Shrapnel Shell Manufacture 1915 1

SHRAPNEL SHELL
MANUFACTURE
SHRAPNEL SHELL
MANUFACTURE
A COMPREHENSIVE TREATISE ON THE FORGING, MACHINING, AND HEAT-TREATMENT OF SHELLS, AND THE MANUFACTURE OF CARTRIDGE CASES AND FUSES FOR SHRAPNEL USED IN FIELD AND MOUNTAIN ARTILLERY, GIVING COMPLETE DIRECTION FOR TOOL EQUIPMENT AND METHODS OF SETTING UP MACHINES, TOGETHER WITH GOVERNMENT SPECIFICATIONS FOR THIS CLASS
OF MUNITIONS
By
DOUGLAS
T.
HAMILTON
ASSOCIATE EDITOR OF MACHINERY AUTHOR OF "ADVANCED GRINDING PRACTICE,"
"AUTOMATIC SCREW MACHINE PRACTICE," "MACHINE FORGING," ETC.
FIRST EDITION
NEW YORK
THE INDUSTRIAL PRESS

1915
COPYRIGHT,
1915
BY
THE INDUSTRIAL PRESS NEW YORK
PREFACE
The design of shrapnel and the machining of its component parts are matters which, at the present time, are of world-wide interest to manufacturers, engineers, toolmakers, and mechanics in general. Shrapnel is used in enormous quantities in the great European war, and American machine tool builders have been called upon to provide machines and tool equipment of the latest and most efficient design to meet the demands made upon the manufacturers of shrapnel. Many shops are running full force, day and night, and are months behind with their orders. The great importance of shrapnel manufacture, at the pres-
ent time, is, therefore, unquestioned. small percentage of shrapnel shells are now made from bar stock, but most shrapnel bodies are made from forgings, formed hollow in hydraulic presses or in forging machines. The forging processes, which are of extraordi-
nary
the
interest, especially to those
who know something
of
attending them, are, however, not finishing processes. Whether made from the bar or forged hollow, all shrapnel shells must be very accurately finished by madifficulties
chining.
This book has been brought out to meet the demands for a treatise dealing comprehensively with the construction, forging and machining operations, and the tool equipment used for making the shell, fuse parts, and brass cases. In this book are included not only the unusually complete articles on shrapnel manufacture contained in the April, 1915, number of MACHINERY, of which 5000 extra copies were printed and 5000 additional reprints made, all of which have been sold, but it also includes all other material that has been published at various times in MACHINERY relating to shrapnel manufacture, together with a great deal of material obtained by the Editors especially for this book;
and, in addition to this,
it
contains abstracts of the
official
with line-engravings of the details of Russian, British, and American shrapnel shell bodies, Hence, it is believed that the fuses, and cartridge cases. book will prove the most valuable addition to the literature
specifications, together
on the manufacture of munitions that has been made since

the beginning of the great war.
D. T. H.
NEW
YORK, October, 1915.
CONTENTS
PAGES
CHAPTER
I.
Shrapnel Shells
1-19
CHAPTER
II.
Forging Shrapnel Shells
20-39
CHAPTER
III.
Machining
and
Heat-treatment
of
Shrapnel Shells
40-74
CHAPTER
IV.
Machines and Tools for Shrapnel Manufacture
75-142
CHAPTER V.
Making Fuse Parts
143-171
CHAPTER VI.
Making Shrapnel Cartridge Cases
172-193
CHAPTER
VII.
Specifications for the Inspection of the
Manufacture and Russian 3-inch

194-212
Shrapnel Shell
CHAPTER
VIII.
Specifications for the Manufacture and Inspection of the Combination Fuse for Russian 3-inch Shrapnel Shells
213-230
CHAPTER IX.
Specifications for the Manufacture and Inspection of Russian 3-inch Shrapnel
and High-explosive Cartridge Cases
231-250
CHAPTER X.
Specifications
for
British
18-pounder
Quick-firing Shrapnel Shell
251-259
CHAPTER XI.
PAGES
Specifications for British Combination
Time and Percussion Fuses
260-275
CHAPTER XII.
Specifications
for
British
Quick-firing
Cartridge
18-pounder Case and
Primer
276-285
CHAPTER
XIII.
Specifications Shells
for
American Shrapnel
286-292
INDEX
293-296
SHRAPNEL SHELL MANUFACTURE

CHAPTER
I
SHRAPNEL SHELLS
IN NAVAL, coast defense and artillery operations, several types of explosive shells are used; the chief ones are: the armor-piercing shell, made to pierce armor -plate before exploding; shells exploded by means of a timing fuse; shells exploded by either a timing or percussion fuse and
;
exploded by percussion only. Each different shell has some definite function to fulfill, and is designed for that purpose. For field or artillery operations, the shrapnel and lyddite are the two principal types used. Of these, shrapnel is the most prominent, because of its destructive power and its interesting mechanical construction.
shells
Development of Shrapnel. The shrapnel shell in 1784 by Lieut. Henry Shrapnel, and was the British Government in 1808. As is shown at adopted by A in Fig. 2, the first shell was spherical in shape, and the powder or explosive charge was mixed with the bullets. Although this type of shell was an improvement over the grape and canister previously used, its action was not altogether satisfactory, as the shell, on bursting, projected the bullets in all directions and there was also a liability of premature explosion. In order to overcome the defects mentioned, Col. Boxer separated the bullets from the bursting charge by a sheet-iron diaphragm, as shown at B in Fig. 2. This shell was called a diaphragm shell to differentiate it
Early
was invented
from the
first shell
of this type.
In the shell made by Col. Boxer, the lead bullets were hardened by the addition of antimony, and as the bursting charge was small, the shell was weakened by cutting four
SHRAPNEL SHELLS
grooves extending from the fuse hole to the opposite side of the shell. Shells of spherical shape were first fired out of plain-bored guns, and upon the advent of the rifled gun it was necessary to add a circular base, which was made of wood and covered with sheet iron or steel to take the rifling grooves. The first shrapnel shells were made of cast iron, but a later development was to use steel and elongate the body, reducing it in diameter. The diameter of the bullets was also reduced so that a greater number could be contained in a slightly smaller space. The improved shrapnel
also capable of being more accurately directed. Shrapnel Shells of Present-day Design. Shrapnel shells, as used at the present time by the different governments, vary slightly in construction and general contour as well as in the constituents entering into their different members. As shown in Fig. 1, a completed shrapnel comprises a brass case carrying a detonating primer and the explosive charge for propelling the projectile out of the bore of the gun. The projectile itself comprises a forged shell that carries the lead bullets and bursting charge. Screwed into the front end is the combination timing and percussion fuse which can be set so as to explode the shell at any desired point, and from which the flame for exploding the bursting charge is conveyed through a powder timing train and a tube filled with powder pellets down through the diaphragm to the powder pocket. Of these members of a shrapnel, the shell and timing fuse present the most interesting features from a mechanical standpoint. The shell used by most governments is made from a forging, machined to the desired dimensions in hand and semi-automatic turret lathes as well as in ordinary engine lathes. The fuse is an extremely accurate piece of
is largely produced from screw machine some of which, however, are forged previous to machining. The brass cartridge case the next member of importance is drawn from a brass blank by successive operations in drawing presses, and is indented and headed. Fol-
was
mechanism, and
parts,
lowing this, several machining operations are performed on the head and primer pocket.
SHRAPNEL SHELLS
Shrapnel shells are made in Types of Shrapnel Shells. two distinct types, one of which is known as the common shell, and the other as the high explosive. The common shell
is
whereas the high-explosive
a base-charged shrapnel, fitted with a combination fuse, shell is fitted with a combination
Fig.
1.
Types of Shrapnel Shells used by the American, Russian, German, French, and British Governments
fuse and, in addition, with a high-explosive head, the head also bursting and flying into atoms upon impact. The highexplosive shell is not ruptured upon the explosion of the bursting charge in the base, but the head is forced out and
SHRAPNEL SHELLS
the bullets are shot out of the case with an increased In the meantime, the head continues in its flight velocity.
and detonates on impact.

extensively as the
This type of shell
is
not used as
common
common
following.
shrapnel shell
shrapnel, and, therefore, the alone will be taken up in the
The Explosive Charge. Reference to Fig. 1 will show that as far as the construction of the shrapnel shell and case is concerned, there is very little difference in those emloyed by the various governments. Starting with the cases, it
Machinery
Fig.
2.
Original Shell designed by Lieut. Henry Shrapnel Col. Boxer's Improvement
and
will be seen that these are almost identical, except for length
and the arrangement of the head for carrying the detonating primer. There is a marked similarity in this respect between the Russian, the British, and the German, and between the American and the French. The form of the explosive charge held in the brass case differs in almost every instance, but without exception smokeless powder in some
form or other is used. In the American shell, nitrocellulose powder composed of multi-perforated cylindrical grains each 0.35 inch long and 0.195 inch in diameter are used. In the Russian case, smokeless powder of crystalline structure is used. In the German, smokeless (nitrocellulose) powder in long sticks and arranged in bundles is held in the case.
SHRAPNEL SHELLS
The French use
stick smokeless powder^ 1/2 millimeter (0.0195 thick by 12.69 millimeters (!/2 inch) wide. Two inch) or rows of this powder are arranged in the case. lengths
The British use a smokeless powder of crystalline structure somewhat similar to the Russian, but in some cases cordite has also been used, although of late this type of powder has not been quite as commonly employed. The detonating agent or primer held in the head of the
case varies in almost every type of shrapnel. Practically all primers are provided with "safety heads," so that the shrapnel can be handled without danger of premature explosion. The object, of course, of the detonating agent or primer is
to detonate or cause the
sudden explosion of the explosive charge in the shell for propelling the shrapnel out of the
gun.
field
The Shrapnel Shell. The shell itself, as previously mentioned, is made either from a forging or from bar stock.
Forgings, however, are used to a greater extent than bar
stock, because the forged shell is
more homogeneous
in its
structure than the bar-stock shell, and piping a serious objection in the bar-stock shell is entirely eliminated. The shells used by the British, Russian, and German governments are made almost exclusively from forgings, whereas those used by the French and American governments are made both from forgings and bar stock. When the French
stock, an auxiliary base is screwed any danger of piping. Near the base of all shells is a groove in which a bronze or copper band is hydraulically shrunk. This is afterward machined to the desired shape and takes the rifling grooves in the gun so as to rotate the shell when it is expelled. The body of the shell itself is slightly smaller than the bore in the gun, and the rifling band, which is larger and which is compressed into
shell is
made from bar
into
it
to eliminate
the rifling grooves, rotates the projectile, thus keeping it in a straight line laterally during flight. The bursting charge, which in practically all cases is common black powder, is carried in the base of the shell and is usually enclosed in a tin cup. Located above this is the diaphragm which is used for carrying the lead bullets out of the shell when the burst-
SHRAPNEL SHELLS
ing charge explodes and distributes them in a fan shape. In most shells, upon exploding, the nose blows out, stripping the threads that hold the members together. It will, therefore, be seen that, in the explosion, the entire fuse, fuse base, tube, diaphragm and bullets are all ejected, the shell itself acting as a secondary cannon in the air. The number of lead bullets carried in the 3-inch shrapnel shells ranges from 210 to 360. In all cases, the lead bullets inch in diameter, weigh approximately 167 are about and are kept from moving in the shell by resin or grains, other smoke-producing matrix. The matrix put in with the lead bullets, in addition to keeping them from rattling, is also used as a "tracer." It is of importance in firing shrapnel that the position of the explosion be plainly seen. With large shells this is not difficult, but with shrapnel for field guns at long range certain conditions of the atmosphere make it difficult to see when the shell actually bursts. Various mixtures are used to overcome this difficulty. In some cases, fine-grained black powder is compressed in with the In the German bullets in order to give the desired effect. shrapnel, a mixture of red amorphous phosphorus and finegrained powder which produces a dense white cloud of smoke is used, and in the Russian, a mixture of magnesium antimony sulphide is used. The range of a 3-inch shrapnel shell is about 6500 yards, and the muzzle velocity of the quick-firing field gun ranges from 1700 on the American to 1930 feet per second on the Russian field gun. The duration of flight ranges from 21 to 25 seconds. The Development of Timing and Percussion Fuses. first fuses used in field ammunition were short iron or copper tubes filled with a slow-burning composition. These were screwed into a fuse hole provided in the shell, but there was no means for regulating the time of burning. Later about the end of the seventeenth century the fuse case was made of paper or wood so that by drilling a hole through into the composition the fuse could be made to burn for approximately the desired length of time before exploding the shell, or the fuse could be cut to the correct length to accomplish the same purpose.
SHRAPNEL SHELLS
For a considerable time
all
attempts to produce a percusUpon the discovery of fulminate of mercury in 1799, the chief requirement of a percussion fuse was obtained. About fifty years elapsed, howThe first perever, before a satisfactory fuse was made. cussion fuse was known as the Pettman fuse, and comprised a roughened ball covered with detonating composition that was released upon the discharge of the gun. When the shell hit the desired object, the ball struck against the inner walls of the fuse, exploded the composition and powder charge, thus bursting the shell. There are at the present time three First, those depending on principal types of fuses in use in the gun setting the pellet of the fuse free gas pressure this is a base fuse second, those relying on the shock of discharge or the rotation of the shell to set the pellet free used in nose and base fuses; third, those depending on
sion fuse were unsuccessful.
: ;
impact. In shrapnel shells advantage is taken of two types of fuses, one of which is the combination timing and percussion fuse used on common shrapnel, and the other the combination timing and percussion fuse of the high-explosive type used on high-explosive shrapnel. These types of fuses are again sub-divided, but only in the manner of construction. The most common fuse is that known as the combination timing and percussion fuse of the double-banked type. This is used in practically all shrapnel fuses except the French. The advantage of the double ring of composition shown at A and B in Fig. 3 is to give a greater length of composition and more accurate burning. Triplebanked and quadruple-banked fuses on the same principle have been designed, but at the present time have not been introduced. Operation of Combination Timing and Percussion Fuses.
in which the combination timing and percusregulated to discharge the bursting charge in the shrapnel shell is interesting and involves extremely difficult mathematical calculations. Before going into the method of setting the fuse, it would probably be advisable to describe briefly just how the fuse operates. As an ex-
The manner
is
sion fuse
SHRAPNEL SHELLS
ample of the double-banked fuse, Fig. 3 shows that adopted by the United States government. The following description applies to this type of fuse.
Assume, first, that the timing ring is set at zero. The propelling force given to the shrapnel shell in leaving the bore of the gun is such as to sever the wire C from plunger
G. Plunger G carries a concussion primer which is discharged by hitting firing pin D. The flame passes out
Machinery
Fig.
3.
American Type
Combination Timing and Percussion Fuse used on Shrapnel Shells

of
through vent E, igniting the powder pellet F and the upper end of train A, and then through the vent H. From here, the flame is transmitted to the lower timing ring B through vent / and the magazine J, and from there through the tube to the bursting charge in the base of the shrapnel shell. Assume any other setting, say 12 seconds. The vent is now changed in position with respect to vent F leading to
SHRAPNEL SHELLS
the upper timing train, and the vent / leading to the powder magazine J is also changed. The flame, therefore, now passes through vent E and burns along the upper time train is A in a counterclockwise direction until the vent reached. It then passes down to the beginning of the lower timing train and burns back in a clockwise direction to the position of vent /, from which it is transmitted by the pellet
Machinery
Fig. 4.
Russian Type of Combination Timing and Percussion Fuse

used on
Shrapnel
Shells
of compressed
J.
powder
in this vent to the
powder magazine
should be understood that the annular grooves in the lower face of each timing train do not form complete circles, a solid portion being left between the grooves in the ends of each. This solid portion is used to obtain a setting at which the fuse cannot be exploded and is known as the "safety point." As shown in Fig. 6, it is marked S on the
It
adjustable timing ring.
10
SHRAPNEL SHELLS
The timing fuse shown
in Fig. 3 is of the combination
timing and percussion type, and if the wire C fails to release percussion plunger G, the shell is exploded by means of a percussion fuse which comes into use when the shell
strikes.
The percussive mechanism consists of a primer held in an inverted position in the center of the fuse body by a cup located beneath the percussive primer. Percussion plunger
L works in a recess in the base of the fuse body and is kept at the bottom of the recess away from contact with the primer by a light spring in plunger M. The firing pin N is mounted on a f ulcrumed pin, and is normally kept in the vertical position by means of two side spring When the shell strikes, the impact causes the plungers. plunger to snap up against the primer after compressing the spring in pin M. This causes the firing of the primer K and the explosive charge passes out through a hole in the percussion plunger chamber, not shown, to the magazine / and from there down to the powder in the base of the shell. Russian Fuse. The Russian fuse shown in Fig. 4 differs in a few minor details from the American fuse, the only chief difference being in the arrangement of the percussive mechanisms. The percussive plunger for the timing arrangement is kept up from the firing pin by means of a spring bushing E surrounding the body of the plunger. This bushing is expanded by the plunger which is forced through it due to the force of the shrapnel in leaving the bore of the gun. The spring B in the head of the fuse assists the plunger in expanding bushing E and in dropping down onto the firing pin C. The flame from the exploded primer then travels down to the powder in the shell in practically the same way that it does in the American fuse, except that the magazine chamber is located at D and explodes through the impact fuse chamber. The percussive arrangement for setting the shell off by impact is slightly different from that in the American fuse, in that the primer and firing pin are held apart by means of springs, the inertia of which is overcome when the shell strikes an
object.
SHRAPNEL SHELLS
11
French Fuse. With the exception of a few minor dethe timing fuses used in American, Russian, British, German, Japanese, etc., shrapnel shells are the same. The French timing fuse, however, as shown by the diagram Fig. 5, operates on an entirely different principle. In this fuse, the firing for the timing train is contained in a sealed tube of pure tin and is wound spirally around the head of the fuse. Inside of the head is the ignition arrangement. To set the timing part of this fuse, it is placed in a fusesetting machine attached to the field gun and, by forcing down a handle on this device, a piercing point is thrust through the outer cap of the fuse, penetrating to the int e r i o r space of the head as shown at A. Upon the discharge of the shell from the gun, the gas pressure forces
tails,
firing pin
t
i
back, hit-
n g the percussive primer C. This causes a flame which passes out through the opening previously punched at A and ignites the
"rope" powder
Machinery
Fig.
5. French Type of Combination Timing and Percussion Fuse
fuse
which is wound around the head of the fuse

body.
This t y p e o f
sets off the shell
fuse
is
also provided with a fuse

is
which
fail to work. The head covered with a cap with holes for the piercing point, and the whole cap can be shifted around for a short distance and set by the corrector scale marked on the body, as shown in Fig. 1. A projection on the cap engages a recess in the fuse-setting machine and provides for this movement.
by impact should the timing fuse

of the fuse
The accuracy with which a shrapFiring of Shrapnel. nel can be exploded in the air at any desired point is remarkable, considering the number of variable quantities
12
SHRAPNEL SHELLS
that enter into the construction of the timing fuse and powder train, etc. The calculations necessary for finding the correct setting on the timing ring involve, however, the use of higher mathematics and are consequently not within
the scope of this treatise. In Fig. 6, the timing ring used on the American fuse is shown. Here it will be seen that the ring is provided with twenty-one graduations corresponding to twenty-one seconds in the duration of flight of the projectile. It will also be noticed that the spacing of the
graduations differs. The reason for this

is
found in the
rela-
tion of the vents, the positions of the
lower timing train, the trajectory of the

flying
missile,
and
the decrease of velocity.
Diagram
esting
shows in an
Fig. 7 interjust
is
manner
how a
fired.
Machinery
shrapnel
The range
is
-
approximately
o b
tained by panoramDiagram showing how Timing Ring Fig. 6. ic sights or other on the American Combination Timing and Percussion Fuse is laid out means, and a test shell fired, the point of explosion noted, and the necessary table which has been worked out for corrections made. In Fig. 7 the diagram different distances is then used. shown pertains to the American quick-firing field gun having a muzzle velocity of 1700 feet per second and the American shrapnel of 3-inch size. It will be noted that at 2000 yards the terminal velocity of the shrapnel is 1038 feet per second and the time of flight for the projectile 4.75 seconds. In other words, the timing train to explode the shrapnel at
14
SHRAPNEL SHELLS
and the cartridge case that car-
in the base of the projectile,

ries the
in propelling the projectile out of the bore of the gun. high-explosive shell also comprises three principal parts, but the projectile, instead of
powder charge used
carrying a charge of bullets and black powder, is filled with a high-explosive material, which, when detonated, bursts the body of the projectile into small pieces that are thrown off with great velocity and destructive effect. Shrapnel is used against troops in the open field, whereas high-explosive shells, which may be either of the ordinary or of the armorpiercing type, are used against fortifications, etc. Classification of Explosives. The explosives used in shrapnel and high-explosive shells may be divided into three 1. general classes: Progressive or propelling explosives known as "low" explosives. 2. Detonating or disrupknown as "high" explosives. 3. Detonative explosives tors known as "fulminates." The first of these includes black gun powder, smokeless powder, and black blasting
powder.
etc.
The second, dynamite, nitroglycerine, gun cotton, The third includes chiefly fulminates and chlorates.
classes of explosives, the effect of the explosion
is
In
all
dependent upon the quantity of gas and the heat developed per unit of weight and volume of the explosive, the rapidity
of the reaction, and the character of the confinement, of the explosive charge.
if
any,
For certain explosives, such as smokeExplosives. the explosive action does not differ in principowder, ple from the burning of a piece of wood or other combustible material. The combustion is very rapid, but is a surface
less
Low
tire grain is
progressing from layer to layer until the enconsumed. Such materials are known as "low" explosives, although the power developed through the combustion of a unit weight may be very great. The progressive emission of gas from a low explosive, such as burning gun powder, produces a pushing effect upon a projectile without unduly /straining the gun, whereas the sudden conversion of an equal weight of a high explosive, such as nitroglycerine, into gas, would develop such high pressures as to rupture the gun.
action,
SHRAPNEL SHELLS
In high High Explosives. gun cotton, picric acid,
15
cerine,
explosives, such as nitroglyetc., the progress of the ex-
plosive reaction is not by burning from layer to layer, but, instead, consists of an initial breaking up of the molecules, giving rise to an explosive wave, which is transmitted with
great velocity in all directions throughout the mass, and causes it to be converted almost instantly into a gas. The velocity of this explosive wave has been determined, for some materials, to be more than 20,000 feet, or approximately four miles, per second. Detonators or Fulminates. The action of fulminates is much more powerful than either the low or high explosives described. They can be readily detonated by slight shock or by the application of heat, and are used in primers, for setting off the propelling charge in a cartridge case, and in fuses, either of the plain percussion or of the combination time and percussion types. The most common fulminate is made by dissolving mercury in strong nitric acid and then
pouring the solution into alcohol. After an apparently viomass of fine, gray crystals of fulminate of is produced. The crystalline powder thus promercury duced is washed with water to free it from acid and is then mixed with glass ground to a fine powder. Because of its extreme sensitiveness to heat produced by the slightest friction, it is usually kept soaked in water or alcohol until
lent reaction, a
needed.
Black powder, because of its "pushing" effect when exploded, is used extensively as a base charge for shrapnel shells in expelling the bullets from the projectile. It comprises three principal elements 75 parts of saltpeter, in about the following proportions 15 parts of charcoal, and 10 parts of sulphur. These ingredients must be absolutely free from impurities and, in manufacturing, great care is taken in refining the saltpeter
Manufacture
of Black
Powder.
and sulphur, and in burning the charcoal, to prevent the introduction of any foreign substances. After purification, the ingredients are carefully weighed in the proper proportions and mixed for about 5 minutes in a revolving drum
provided with mixing arms. The mixed charge
is
now ground
16
SHRAPNEL SHELLS
for several hours, the charge being moistened occasionally with distilled water, the resulting mixture being what is It is then reduced to fine meal in a called a "milk cake." machine having Tobin bronze or gun-metal rollers, after
which
it is
compressed under hydraulic pressure.
The next operation comprises the granulating of the powder, which is done in a strong Tobin bronze or gun-metal framework carrying two pairs of toothed and two pairs of plain Tobin bronze or gun-metal rollers. The "cake" is cut into pieces by these rollers and falls on screens which sift it into grains of the required size. The grains are then from the dust in a revolving screen, and the high separated polish or glaze is produced by putting the powder into drums or glazing barrels, which revolve constantly for
several hours.
effect.
Graphite
is
generally used to provide the
The powder is now dried in a stove heated glazing steam pipes, and is spread upon canvas trays placed by
on shelves. Manufacture of Smokeless Powder. Smokeless powder, which is used in various forms in cartridge cases, was discovered in 1846 by a German chemist Schoenbein. The
chief ingredient of smokeless powder is cotton. The porThe tion of cotton used is generally the short fiber.
first
attempts to produce gun cotton were unsatisfactory, and several very serious explosions occurred. Many of the difficulties in its manufacture were overcome by an AusStill further progress was made by a trian, von Lenk. Swedish engineer, Alfred Nobel, and the improved explosive was patented in 1888 under the name of "ballistite." One of the principal smokeless powders is known as "cordite", this name being derived from the cord-like form it assumes in manufacture. The first compositions of cordite were: 58 per cent of nitroglycerine; 37 per cent of gun This composition, cotton; and 5 per cent of mineral jelly. after considerable use, was found to have a slight deteriorating effect on the bore of the gun, and after ten years' use was modified to the following proportions 30 per cent of nitroglycerine 65 per cent of gun cotton and 5 per cent
:
of mineral jelly.
SHRAPNEL SHELLS
The brand
of smokeless
17
powder used most extensively as
a propelling charge in shrapnel or high-explosive shells is known as nitrocellulose, and, as is common with cordite, the base of this is cotton, as previously explained. It is manufactured as follows: After bleaching and purifying, the cotton is run through a picker which opens up the fibers and breaks up any lumps. It is then thoroughly dried and is ready for nitration. The most generally used method of nitration is to put the cotton into a large vessel filled with a mixture of nitric and sulphuric acids. The sulphuric acid absorbs the water developed in the process of nitration, which would otherwise too greatly dilute the nitric acid. After a few minutes' immersion, the pot is rapidly rotated by power, and the acid permitted to escape. Following this, the nitrated cotton is washed for a short time and then removed from the nitrator or pot and repeatedly washed or As the keeping boiled to remove all traces of free acid. qualities of the nitrated cotton are dependent upon the thoroughness with which it is purified, the specifications for powder for the United States army and navy require that the nitrocellulose shall be given at least five boilings at this stage of the manufacture, with a change of water after each boiling, the total time of boiling being forty hours. Following this preliminary purification, the nitrocellulose
cut up into shorter lengths, by being rapidly run between This operation cylinders carrying revolving knives. known as "pulping" is necessary because of the difficulty experienced in removing the free acid, unless the fibers
is
are cut up into short lengths. After pulping, the nitrocellulose is given six more boilings, with a change of water after each, followed by ten The material is now known as gun cold water washings. cotton or pyrocellulose. Previous to adding the solvent, This is generally accomthis must be free from water. in a circular wringer, and in addition by compressplished ing the pyrocellulose into solid blocks. Alcohol is forced through the compressed mass. Ether is then added to the pyrocellulose already impregnated with alcohol, the relative proportions being two parts, by volume, of ether to one
18
SHRAPNEL SHELLS
part of alcohol. After the ether has been thoroughly incorporated in a kneading machine, the material is placed in a hydraulic press and formed into cylindrical blocks about 10 inches in diameter and 15 inches long. It is then transferred to a finishing press where it is again forced through dies and comes out in the form of long strips or rods, which are cut into pieces of the length and widths It is in this finishing process that the various required. governments differ in their methods of manufacture. The United States Government uses a short perforated circular block, whereas the French use flat sticks about 0.0195 inch thick by inch wide. Two lengths or rows of these sticks are arranged in the cartridge case. The cut up pieces are subjected to a drying process which removes nearly all the solvent and leaves the material in a suitable condition for use. The drying process is a lengthy one, amounting to as much as four or five months for powder in large pieces. Upon completion, the powder is blended and packed in air-
tight boxes.
Manufacture of High Explosives. The explosive charges used in high-explosive shells are known by various trade names, such as: emmensite, lyddite, melinite, maximite,
nitrobenzole, nitronaphthaline, shimose, trinitrotoluol, turpenite, etc. The base of such explosives as emmensite, maxis
imite, lyddite, melinite, and shimose, is picric acid, which secured from coal tar, subjected to fractional distillation.
The
liquid
which comes
off
when
this
is
raised to a tem-
perature of 150 degrees C. is called "light" oil, and when these light oils have been again distilled, the next fraction
or "middle" oil yields phenol or carbolic acid. This substance when nitrated gives off picric acid. Experiments with lyddite shells showed their behavior to be very erratic, some exploding with great effect, while others gave disappointing results. This was due to the fact that picric acid
requires a powerful detonator to obtain the highest explosive effect. The use of such a detonator, however, is dangerous, and extensive experiments have brought forth a new high
explosive known as trinitrotoluol generally termed T. N. T. Although the explosive force of trinitrotoluol is slightly
SHRAPNEL SHELLS
less
19
than that of picric acid, the pressure of the latter being 135,820 pounds per square inch as against 119,000 pounds for trinitrotoluol, its advantages more than compensate for the difference. Trinitrotoluol is obtained by the nitration of toluene, contained in the crude benzol distilled from coal tar and washed out from coal gas. The crude benzol contains
roughly
:
Per cent
Benzine Toluene
50 36
11
Xylene Other substances
Toluene to be used for the manufacture of trinitrotoluol should be a clear water-like liquid, free from suspended solid matter, and having a specific gravity of not less than
Trinitrotol0.868, nor more than 0.870, at 15.5 degrees C. uol when pure has no odor and is a yellowish crystalline
powder which darkens slightly with age. It cannot be exploded by flame or strong percussion, and a rifle bullet may be fired through it without any effect. When heated to 180 degrees C., it ignites and burns with a heavy black smoke; but when detonated by a fulminate of mercury
detonator, it explodes with great violence, giving off a black smoke.. Shells containing this explosive, first used on the western battle front, were given such names as "coal boxes,"
"Jack Johnsons," "Black Marias," etc., by the allies. The Russians and Austrians use a high explosive known as ammonal in which 12 to 15 per cent of trinitrotoluol is mixed with an oxidizing compound, ammonium nitrate, a
small amount of aluminum powder, and a trace of charcoal. This high explosive gives somewhat better results than plain trinitrotoluol, but has the one disadvantage of easily collecting moisture, and consequently must be made up in The British are now using an imair-tight cartridges.
proved compound of this character, which is so prepared that trouble is not experienced with the collection of
moisture.
CHAPTER
II
FORGING SHRAPNEL SHELLS
WITHIN the last few months, many methods have been suggested for making shrapnel forgings, but a comparatively small number have been put into use. Practically speaking, no two governments have adopted the same method. The Russian government uses double-acting horizontal hydraulic forging presses in which two operations are performed at the same time on different forgings. For instance, while the punch in one end of the machine is
piercing a heated billet, the ram on the return stroke performs the hot drawing operation on another shell located at the opposite end of the machine. In this way a shell is at each cycle of the machine forward and recompleted turn stroke. The French government, up to a short time ago, used steam hammers for this purpose, and produced
shrapnel forgings in practically the same manner as a dropforging is made, the punch being carried in the ram of the This is rather a slow press and the die held on the bed. process and requires more than one heating to complete the forging. The German government uses a horizontal hydraulic forging press for piercing the billet and a steam driven machine for drawing the forging, which receives its motion from a rack and pinion. This method has the advantage over the hydraulic press of being more economical in the consumption of power. The methods followed by different concerns in this country and Canada, at the present time, differ to a large extent. Some manufacturers are using a method that dates back as far as 1890, as will be described later. Others are using a more improved method developed about 1895, whereas about three concerns are using a still more improved method developed within the past year.
The first Caley Method of Making Shrapnel Forgings. method (known as the Caley process) of making shrapnel forgings in this country had its inception about 1890 and
20
21
This comprised exclusively until 1895. a slug-forming and billet-piercing operation followed by a successive reduction and elongation of the forging through drawing dies The order of these operations is shown diagrammatically in Fig. 1. The information given herewith pertains to the making of a forging for a 3-inch shrapnel As shown at D, a billet of steel 3*4 inches in diameshell. ter and 6% inches long was cut off from a bar with a cold
was used almost
Machinery
Fig.
1.
Diagram showing Caley Process

Forgings
in
of
making Shrapnel
Hydraulic Forging Presses
saw, and formed into a cone shape under a vertical hyThe billet was draulic press having a capacity of 100 tons. heated in a furnace to about 1900 degrees F., dropped into the impression in the die and forced into shape by a hydraulic plunger having a depression in the lower end which centered the blank. The result of this operation is shown
at F.
Machinery
Fig. 2.
22
Watson-Stlllman Hydraulic Forging Press of the Vertical Type used for making Shrapnel Forgings
23
The next was pierced
step was to anneal the billet, after which it as shown at C, and at the same time slightly
This operation was handled in a hydraulic elongated. On a 0.70 per cent of the type shown in Fig. 2. press carbon steel billet the pressure on the punch in the piercing operation was 20,000 pounds per square inch, and the
machine used was a vertical hydraulic forging press of the type referred to having a capacity of 100 tons. From the
piercing operation the forging was taken direct without annealing to the horizontal hydraulic draw press, and, as is shown at H, was located on a punch and forced through a series of drawing dies which gradually reduced the shell
to the correct diameter, 3Vs inches, inches. the required length, about
and drew
it
out to
8%
A point worthy of attention is the preparation of the cone-shaped billet. The smallest end was made slightly smaller than the smallest reduction die in the series. The reason for this was that if any drawing were done on the end of the shell the front corner would be drawn over and deformed, increasing the amount of machining required.
The drawing dies in this case were six in number, as shown at H, and were reduced on a sliding scale of the following
proportional reductions. First, 0.100 inch; second, 0.080 inch; third, 0.060 inch; fourth, 0.040 inch; fifth, 0.030 inch ; and sixth, 0.020 inch. This gave dies of the following sizes, in inches, starting with the largest in the series 3.355,
:
3.275, 3.215, 3.175, 3.145, The shape given to the
and 3.125. drawing edges of the
dies is of
prime importance. was beveled to an angle of 20 degrees leading to a liberal curve which terminated in a land 1/16 inch wide. The shape was finished off with a %-inch radius. These dies were made from chilled cast iron and were held in position as shown at H being slipped into a pocket in the frame of the machine, as shown at /. The punches for the coning, piercing and hot drawing operations were made from speThe first drawing die in the series cial hot punching steel.
y
The mouth or entering
side of the hole
lasted the longest because the metal
than when
it
was hotter at was drawn completely through the
this point
dies.
As
24
25
a rule, the last drawing die turned out 100 shells before being worn or scored. Then it was reground to a larger size and used again. The drawing punch was lubricated After drawing, the forging is occasionally with graphite. This annealed to obtain the proper physical qualities. method of making forgings for a 3-inch shrapnel shell is capable of producing 400 in ten hours.
About Holinger Method of Making Shrapnel Forgings. 1895 the following method, known as the Holinger process Instead of of making shrapnel forgings, was devised. the billet conical in shape before piercing, this premaking liminary operation was dispensed with, and to facilitate the work, as well as to reduce the friction of the flowing metal, the arrangement of the piercing punch and die was changed. This process is shown in Figs. 3 and 4, and was accomplished in a hydraulic press provided with two cylinders, one located at the bottom and the other at the top of the
press.
The operation was as follows: The die a was held in a movable frame b and the piston c acted first. The first position after the billet was dropped into the die is shown Here the die a and punch d remained stationary at B. while the piston c descended, pushing the billet through the die and over the punch. When the piston reached the end of its stroke, as shown at C, the lower cylinder began to act and the frame carrying the die was raised. This frame, as shown at D, carried a stripper plate e which removed the pierced billet from the punch and located it so that it could be picked off with a pair of tongs. A subsequent operation of hot-drawing as shown at E, Fig. 4, was required, which is similar to that described in the first method. The method just described was used chiefly for 6- and 8-inch shrapnel and projectile forgings, and at the present time is still used for 3- and 6-inch shell forgings. It requires much less power and turns out a better and more concentric forging than the method previously described. The production on 8-inch shells is about 180 in ten hours, and 250 on the
3-inch shell.
27
The inLater Methods of Forging Shrapnel Shells. creased demand for shrapnel within the last few months has been instrumental in bringing about a radical improvement in the production of forged shells. Previously, the aim was to get the internal diameter as close as possible to the finished size and to do comparatively little machining on it; in fact, this is still, in a great number of cases, one of the requirements. While at first glance this would apto be the logical way of handling the work, on further pear investigation it is found that the forging of the shell to the correct size is much more expensive than to leave suffiIn the first place, a hycient metal to machine all over. draulic machine of 100 tons capacity costs considerably more in initial outlay than a turret lathe, and in the second
place it is more expensive to operate. The cheapest method of making a shrapnel forging is to rough-forge it to approximately the correct shape and then finish to exact shape
chucking machines. This simplifies the forging process and also decreases the production costs. One of the later methods of making shrapnel forgings A billet of steel is shown diagrammatically in Fig. 5. 6% inches long by 3 5/16 inches in diameter is heated to a temperature of from 1900 to 2100 degrees F., and then dropped into the impression in the die a held in a special To do this, die a is drawn out from cast-steel die-holder b. beneath the punch, punch guide c removed, and the billet dropped in. Then the guide is replaced and the die-holder The press is now slid in until it contacts with the stop d. operated, and, as shown at B, advances, piercing the billet and making the metal flow up around the walls of the
punch.
and diameter
in turret lathes or semi-automatic
with
The punch now retreats, carrying the centralizing guide c it. The die-holder is now drawn out from under the punch onto a bracket projecting from the bed of the press. The high-carbon steel, hardened block e then drops out of
the die, as is also the case with the finished forging. This block e, of course, is heated up to a considerable extent due to the hot metal resting on it so that several blocks of this
28
kind are provided. In the illustration, as shown at C, cenIn actual tralizing guide c is shown attached to the punch. operation this is not the case. When the punch rises, guide c is stripped from it by stripper plate / so that the guide is gripped with tongs and laid down on the bed of the press until a fresh heated billet has been placed in the die impression ready for the next piercing. The punch is made from special hot punching steel and the die from
Fig.
6.
Producing
Shrapnel Forgings Forging Press
in
750-ton
Hydraulic
The production of forgings by this cast iron. method for a 3-inch shrapnel shell is about 600 in ten
chilled
hours.
varies
The amount of metal left for machining by this method from Vs to 3/16 inch on the internal and external diameters. The forging after annealing is then machined

inside
29
and out on turret lathes, or semi-automatic chucking machines. The accepted method is to first machine the internal diameter and then hold the shell on an expanding arbor and machine it on the external diameter. In Producing Shrapnel Forgings in Hydraulic Presses. the foregoing description various principles of making shrapnel f orgings were described. Owing to the large number of f orgings lately required, practically all types of forging presses and power forging machines have been used. Fig. 6 shows how one manufacturer is solving the problem.
Fig. 7.
Piercing Billets for Shrapnel Forgings 750-ton Hydraulic Forging Press

is
in
Wood'
forging press; this
an R. D. Wood Co., 750-ton hydraulic performs both the billet piercing and drawing operations. The forgings turned out on this machine are for the British 18-pound shell, and the billet is 3% inches in diameter by 4i/2 inches long. The first operation, piercing the billet, is done by the punches and dies shown in Fig. 7. The billet is heated in a furnace to a temperature of 2000 degrees F., and then quickly removed
The machine used
and placed in the dies. The press is now operated, ing two billets at the same time. The pierced billet inches in diameter by ?V& inches long.
piercis
S 1/^
A complete batch of pierced billets is first put through, then the pierced billets are taken to the furnace again and heated to 2000 degrees F. The punches and dies in the center of the illustration Fig. 8 are used for finish-drawing the forging by drawing it out to 31/2 inches in diameter by 11 inches long. This method is only temporary and will be
Fig.
8.
Drawing Shrapnel Forgings
in
"Wood' 750-ton
Hydraulic Forging Press
replaced shortly by three R. D. Wood four-post hydraulic The piercing operation will be handled on one presses. of 350 tons capacity, and the drawing operations on press two presses of 200 tons capacity. Making Shrapnel Forgings in Power Forging Machines.
forgings for shrapnel shells
developments in the art of producing is the adaptation of the power machine to this work. As has been previously menforging tioned, there are several methods of producing shrapnel
latest
One of the

shells,
31
has been conclusively proved that the forged made from bar stock, it is only natural that several methods for making the f orgings would be developed. In the forging machine method, a bar slightly larger than the finished diameter of the forging is cut off, making a billet about 5V& inches long. This billet, for a 3inch shell, weighs about 9% to 91/2 pounds. The billet is heated to a white heat in a furnace, the temperature being about 2000 degrees F., depending on the carbon content and other constituents in the steel, and is then placed in the lower impression of the forging die. The
it
and as
shell is superior to the shell
Fig.
9.
Examples
of Shrapnel
Forgings turned out on a Power Forging Machine
machine used for this size of forging is a standard upsetting and forging machine provided with a special crankshaft. Upon being operated, the lower plunger, which is larger than the diameter of the powder pocket in the shell,
advances and pierces the billet. The pierced billet is then raised to the next impression, and the machine again operated. The second punch is longer than the first and smaller in diameter. The billet is forced up on this punch, which
reduces it in diameter and increases its length. After the second impression the partially formed shell is then placed in the third or final die impression, where it is given two blows, being given one-half turn after the first blow to
form
it
more
perfectly.
The operations
just enumerated
32

billet,
are performed in one heating of the
and the produc-
tion of a 3-inch shell ranges from 400 to 450 in ten hours. The dies for this work are, of course, constructed upon a
different principle from the ordinary forging because in this case it is necessary to make the metal die, flow up on the punches. The dies, therefore, are so constructed that they recede as the punch advances, which tends to make the metal flow up on the punch. The practicability of this method is well illustrated by the samples shown in Fig. 9. Here D is the rough forging just as it comes from the machine, with the exception that the mouth has been trimmed. C is a section of a shell made from low-carbon steel about 0.30 per cent carbon; B is a shell made from 0.50 per cent carbon, 3% per cent nickel steel. This has been rough-turned, as the illustration shows. The homogeneity of the forgings is clearly indicated. A is a forging made from low-carbon steel, finish-turned. One of the most interesting points about this method is To its cost as compared with shells made from bar stock. a 3-inch shell from bar stock requires about 22 produce pounds of material, and on metal costing 10 cents per pound, a bar shell exclusive of machining costs $2.20; to produce the same shell on a power forging machine requires about 9% to 9% pounds, and figuring on 10 cents per pound the cost for the material is only $1 a saving of $1.20 on each shell. Furthermore, the production of shells from bar stock on automatic machines is about twelve to fifteen per day. The number of forgings that can be turned out in the same time is 400 to 450, and the number that can be machined in this time varies from forty to It is therefore evident that the fifty for two operations. production of shells by forging is far superior to the bar method, and the forged shell is more satisfactory from
somewhat
every standpoint. Another interestForging Shrapnel in a Power Press. ing development in the forging line is shown diagrammatiThis method comprises three operations, cally in Fig. 10. and is handled in a No. 80!/2 Bliss press capable of exertbillet 3*4 inches in diameing a pressure of 1200 tons.

ter
33
by 3% inches long is heated in a furnace to 1976 degrees and then quickly placed in the die shown at A. The press is operated, and the punch in descending pierces the billet, being guided by the guide a, as shown at B, which
F.
Machinery
Fig.
10.
Diagram
illustrating
Method
in
Shrapnel Forgings
of piercing and Bliss Power Press
drawing
34
The forging retains its heat to a also acts as a stripper. this operation, the temperature being certain extent after about from 1380 to 1425 degrees F. This is sufficient to
perform the second minor operation which, as shown at C and D, consists in forcing the heated billet into the dieblock to reduce the diameter of the lower end and facilitate
the succeeding operation. This reducing operation is performed with the same type of punch as is used in the succeeding operation, and the die-block is simply laid on top of a bolster while the reducing is being done. The final forming or drawing of the forging is accomplished as shown at E and F, the same type of press, viz., a Bliss No. 80 V power press, being used for this purpose. The pierced billet is now heated to 1976 degress F., and is then forced through the three drawing dies b, c and d, by the punch e. The first die is 3 5/16 inches in diameter and reduces the forging from 3% inches to this size. The second is 3 7/32, and the third, or last, 3Vs inches in diameter. The forging, after being forced through the dies, is stripped from the punch by plates /, and as it still retains a temperature of 1475 degrees F. sufficient for annealing
thrown down on the sand to cool off. The billet piercing and drawing dies, shown in the illustration, were made from 50-point carbon steel, hardened. This gave fair results, although chilled cast-iron dies would prove even more The punches were made from several differsatisfactory. ent materials such as chrome-vanadium, 70-point carbon Of the three masteel, and unannealed malleable casting. terials, the latter gave the most satisfactory results, in that Of course, it was necpitting was reduced to a minimum.
is
essary to grind the malleable casting to shape. Flow of Hot Metal When Pierced. In the manufacture of shrapnel shell forgings, the first operation is that of piercing, and to accomplish this satisfactorily, it is necessary to understand the action of a piercing punch on a
There are certain fundamental semi-plastic billet of steel. laws governing the flow of metals under pressure and a study of these is of exceptional interest. An attempt has
been made in Fig. 11 to illustrate diagrammatically some of
35
the principles involved, and in the following discussion it should be understood that the billet is made from 50-point carbon, 60-point manganese steel, 6i/ by 3 5/16 inches in 2 diameter. At A a round-end tapered punch is shown in contact with the heated billet, and the lines show the possible flow of the metal, i. e., the material commences to "pack" at the end of the punch. In this case the walls of the die are
Fig. 11.
Diagram
illustrating
Flow
of
Hot Metal while being pierced
straight.
ant effect will be seen that the pressure increases as the punch descends, because of the wedging action on the metal and the friction between the surfaces of the sides of the punch and die. The pressure on the end of a punch of this shape is about 20,000 pounds per square inch.
B the billet is being pierced, and the resulton the flow of the metal is indicated. Here it
At
By leaving the sides of the die of the same shape as at B, but making the end of the punch square instead of round
36

is
When the flat contacts with the metal, the pressure required is greater than at A, but as soon as the metal commences to flow as at Z), the pressure decreases. For instance, suppose the pressure required at B to pierce the billet was 100 tons on the same material at D, the reand not tapered, different action
punch, as
caused.
shown
at
(7, first
quired pressure would be only 70 tons a decrease of 30 per cent. The metal, however, does not follow the sides of the punch as closely at D as at B, and this accounts in part for the reduction of power required. The action of hot flowing metal on the face of a square punch is just the reverse of what would naturally be expected. Instead of
Fig. 12.
Shrapnel Shell Head and Diaphragm produced a Power Forging Machine
in
the punch wearing away at the edge, the center first shows Seams are opened up in signs of wear as indicated at e. a radial direction caused by the hot metal attacking the
softest parts in the face of the punch. Again, a different condition exists to that
shown at B and D, when both the die and the punch are tapered as shown at E. Here the friction of the extruded metal on the walls of the die and sides of the punch is excessive, and it
is
billet in this
practically impossible to produce a satisfactorily pierced manner. From a theoretical standpoint, the
conditions
shown
at
are ideal.
Here the
sides of the
37
punch are straight, the end flat, and the walls of the die taper or increase in diameter toward the bottom. In this case the friction of the flowing metal is greatly reduced because of the lessening of the wedging action. Other considerations, however,
make this method impracticable. greater reduction in the pressure necessary to Here a square billet instead pierce a billet is shown at G.
still
Fig. 13.
Diagram Heads in
illustrating
Method of producing Shrapnel Power Forging Machine without any Waste of Stock
Shell
In the plan view it will of a round one is being pierced. be noticed that the friction on the walls of the die is greatly reduced, and the pressure continues low until the extruded The billet contacts all around with the surface of the die. completed product, however, is inferior to that made from a round billet. From the previous remarks, it will be seen
that a punch and die that would best meet the requirements
38
is one having a rounded end as at B, straight sides as at D, and straight walls in the die. The most satisfactory punch and die for piercing shrapnel f orgings when all the variable conditions are considered would be as shown at H. The shrapnel head shown Forging the Shrapnel Head. at A in Fig. 12, that screws into the end of the shell and inSTOP
-BAR STOCK
LJ
Machinery
Diagram illustrating Method of making Shrapnel Shell Fig. Diaphragms in a Special Type of Power Forging Machine
14.
to
which the fuse body

this,
is
screwed,
of
of low-carbon steel for the
French
producing
Fig. 13.
which
is
made from a forging One method of unusual interest, is shown in

is
shell.
power-driven forging machine equipped with a A bar of steel special set of tools is used for this purpose. of the same diameter as the hole in the finished forging,

in this case li/a inch, is
is
39
gripped in the dies as shown at A, upset by means of a plunger a, forming an upset on the end of the bar shown to the right. The upset bar is now placed in the second impression of the gripping dies, as shown at B. By way of explanation, it should be stated that the views of the dies shown at A, B, and C are sections taken in a horizontal plane at each stage or die impression. Upon gripping the upset forging in the second impression in the dies, the plunger b advances and forms an annular groove in the face of the forging, at the same time increasing its width as shown at c. The forging, still integral with the bar, is now quickly removed and placed in the last impression of the dies. The diameter of the hole in these dies is larger than the bar, allowing it to slip back as the punch advances to punch the hole in the forging. When the punch moves forward it carries with it the spring-operated sleeve d, thus finishing the forging in one heat. This method of forging is very satisfactory, producing a homogeneous forging at the rate of 1500 in ten hours. The steel diaphragm Forging the Steel Diaphragm. shown at B in Fig. 12 is made from low-carbon steel in a special type of forging machine operated similarly to a hot-pressed nut machine. That is to say, the bar, instead of being fed in from the front, as in a regular forging maThe manner in which this chine, is fed in from the side.
and
is shown in Fig. 14. flat bar of steel inch thick, heated to the proper teminches wide by perature for a distance of three feet, is fed across the face of the die as at A and located by stop b. Punch c then
is
accomplished
2%
advances and cuts out a blank of the required diameter, forcing it into the die, as shown at B. The metal is now confined between the faces of punches d and c and in die a, and is forged to the required shape. The next step is shown at C, where punch d advances and forces the formed forging out of the die. The production on this diaphragm is in the neighborhood of from 8000 to 10,000 in ten hours.
CHAPTER
III
MACHINING AND HEAT-TREATMENT OF SHRAPNEL SHELLS

shells are manufactured either from bar stock or forgings. The bar-stock method, however, is not considered as satisfactory as forging because of piping, so that the greater number of shrapnel shells made at the
SHRAPNEL
present time are turned out from forgings. The first step, therefore, in the making of a shrapnel shell is to cut off a billet of the required length from a bar of steel of the nec-
Fig.
1.
Shrapnel Shells
in
Various Stages of Manufacture
In the making of an 18-pound shrapfrom a bar of 46-point carbon, 60-point manganese steel in machines of different types. One way of doing this, as shown in Fig. 2, is to use a Newton cutting-off machine having an air clamp for holding the bar in place while it is being cut off. A Hunter duplex saw, as shown in the illustration, provided with high-speed steel inserted teeth, performs the cutting operation. The billet for an 18-pound shrapnel shell is 31/2 inches in diameessary constituents.
nel shell, the billet
is
cut off
40
MACHINING AND HEAT-TREATMENT

ter
41
by 4^ inches long. It is then forged to shape, as has been previously explained. Assuming that the forging has been completed, the following is a complete summary of the machining operations on the shell up to the point of assembling. In one plant
being done, the shrapnel shells are each lot being kept in three shells to a box. Out of every 120, one shell boxes, forty after heat-treatment is tested for tensile strength. The tensile strength before heat-treatment must be from 30,000
this
is
where
work
put through in
lots of 120,
to 40,000
pounds per square inch, and from 80,000 to 90,000
Fig. 2.
Cutting
off Billets for
making Shrapnel Forgings Newton Cutting-off Machine
in
pounds per square inch after heat-treatment. For facilitating transportation, trucks of various designs are used. One type of truck used for this purpose is shown in Fig. 3. This is built by the Chapman Double Ball Bearing Co. of
Canada, Ltd., Toronto, Ontario, and has some interesting
features, the chief of
which are the ball-bearing swiveling head, ball-bearing wheels, and the means of releasing or raising the load with the handle in any position. This feature is valuable in using the truck in a crowded space. Trimming and Facing the Shell Forging. The first machining operation on the forged shell is to cut off the rag-
42
ged end, which is generally from i/2 to li/2 inch longer than that required for the finished shell. This operation is performed in many different ways, but one of the most
common is to place it in a Hurlbut-Rogers cutting-off machine as shown in Fig. 4. For performing the cuttingoff operation, two plain forged cutting-off tools made from "Sabine" extra high-speed steel are used. The forging is located in the proper position in the chuck by a plunger or stop A, sliding in a fixture B clamped to the base of the machine. This plunger locates the shell from the bottom of the hole or powder pocket and forces the shell into the
Fig.
3.
Truck
built
for transferring
by the Chapman Double Ball Bearing Co. Shrapnel Shells about the Shop
chuck against the resistance of an open-wound spring. The stop is then located by a gage C that forms a member of the fixture and fitting ring D on the stop. The chuck jaws are now clamped on the work and the cutting off commences. As soon as the excess stock is cut off, the stop is drawn back and the pressure of the jaws on the work released; the spring in the chuck then ejects the forging. The production of an 18-pound shell from one machine is about 140 in eight hours. The next roughing operation is to face off the bottom or closed end of the forging, bringing the shell to approxi-
43
mately the correct length. There are also many ways of performing this operation. One method is to grip the forging in a chuck, as shown in Fig. 5, in an ordinary lathe and face off the end with a high-speed steel tool held in an inch is faced off Armstrong tool-holder. From 14 to
from the end.
Fig
Cutting
off Excess Length of Shrapnel Forging Hurlbut-Rogers Cutting-off Machine
in
Fig.
5.
Facing
off
Closed End of Shell to Length
PracRough-turning Operations on Shrapnel Forging. every type of engine lathe and turret lathe as well as special machines are used for turning and boring shrapnel forgings, and in the following chapter each method Before doing this, however, will be dealt with separately.
tically
34
a complete summary of the methods of machining employed in a large plant turning out shrapnel will be described. In this plant, the first rough-turning operation is handled on a flat turret lathe, as shown in Fig. 6. For this purpose, the shell forging is held on an expanding arbor and is driven by a dog fastened to it and driven by the faceplate of the lathe. multiple tool turner is first brought into inch from the diameposition and takes a cut of about The next ter for practically the entire length of the shell. tool then faces off the end of the shell to length.
Fig.
6.
First
Rough-turning Operation on Shrapnel Shell in a Flat Turret Lathe
The shell forging is now ready for cutting the rifling band groove and producing the waves. This is handled in
an ordinary engine lathe equipped with a special fixture, The carrying grooving, waving and under-cutting tools. shell forging, as shown in Fig. 7, is held in a chuck at one end and supported by a revolving center at the other. One part of the fixture is clamped to the bed of the lathe and the other to the carriage. The grooving and ribbing is accomplished with a tool held in holder A at the front of the lathe, whereas the two under-cutting tools are held in holders D and E at the rear of the lathe. In operation the carriage of the lathe is moved toward the chuck, carry-
45
ing the fixture to which are fastened cams C, F, and G. Cam C forces in the holder carrying the combination grooving and ribbing tool, whereas cams F and G force in the holders carrying the two under-cutting tools, these being presented at an angle to the work. The required oscillations to the slide carrying the grooving and ribbing tool are secured through a face-cam B clamped to a "Whiten"
chuck.
The face-cam operates against the tension
of
and gives the required oscillations to the toolspring slide carrying the ribbing and grooving tool, shown at A. The third machining operation is accomplished in a flat
turret lathe, as illustrated in Fig.
8.
This consists in fac-
Fig.
7. Cutting the Rifling Band Groove with a Special Grooving and Ribbing Attachment on an Engine Lathe
ing the open end of the shell, boring the powder pocket and facing and boring the diaphragm seat, and also turning the angular surface on the external nose of the shell. First, a roughing drill is brought in to rough out the powder The turret is then indexed and a tool for turning pocket. the angle of the nose is brought into position. The machining on the nose is then accomplished by operating the crossThen a roughing cutter is brought in to sliding head. rough-bore the powder pocket. The turret is again indexed and a finishing tool is brought in to finish the powder pocket and face the diaphragm seat. This finishes the machining operations on the shell previous to heat-treatment.
46
Fig.
Third Machining Operation on Shrapnel Shell in a Flat Turret Lathe, 8. consisting in Facing the Open End of the Shell, Boring the Powder Pocket, Facing and Boring the Diaphragm Seat, and Turning the Angular Surface on the External Nose of the Shell
Fig.
9.
Heat-treating Shrapnel Shells, using a Hoskins Electric Barium-chloride Bath Furnace

Heat-treating Shrapnel Shells.
47
As was previously statforged shrapnel shell after heat-treatment must be from 80,000 to 90,000 pounds per square inch, and in order to obtain the desired physical qualities, it is necessary that the heat-treating operations be properly conducted. Several methods of heat-treating employing different cooling solutions are used in the manued, the tensile strength of a
facturing plants making shrapnel
shells.
One method,
as
Fig.
10.
Testing Hardness of Shrapnel Shells with Shore Scleroscope
shown in Fig. 9, is to heat the shell in a Hoskins electric furnace that contains a barium-chloride bath, heated to a temperature of about 1480 degrees F. The shells are left in this furnace for half an hour and are taken out and dipped in a bath of cotton-seed oil heated to a temperature of 113 degrees F. The temperature to which the shell is heated varies with the different constituents of the steel and practically every different batch of 120 shells requires
48
a slightly different temperature. The proper temperature is determined by cutting out a section of a heat-treated shell and testing it for tensile strength. The next step is to draw the temper on the open end of the shell. In this a muffle gas furnace heated to a temperature of operation about 1000 degrees F., is used. The temper is drawn for about two-thirds of the length of the shrapnel shells. One shell Testing for Hardness and Tensile Strength. from a batch of 120 is now cut open in the proximity of the powder pocket and the cut-out section sent to the government inspectors to test it for tensile strength. Each one of the shells in the batch, in addition, is tested for hardness by a Shore scleroscope as shown in Fig. 10. Before testing for hardness, the shell near the band groove is polished so as to get a true reading, then placed in a fixture, and the hammer of the scleroscope allowed to drop on it. The reading should be between 40 and 50, indicating an
from 80,000 to 90,000 pounds per square must not be ruptured at the point tested when the charge in it is exploded or when the charge in the case is set off. Should the shell upset near the rifling band when it is propelled out of the gun, it would tear groove
elastic limit of
inch.
The
shell
out the rifling in the bore of the gun. Experience with the scleroscope has disclosed the existence of a fairly definite relation between the hardness and strength of metal. In determining the strength of metal, two stages are recognized: First, the elastic limit, determined by the load required to produce a permanent set; second, the ultimate strength, determined by the load required to cause rupture. The hardness indicated by the scleroscope is intimately related to the elastic limit. The elastic limit increases more rapidly than the hardness from 43 to 45, this being the minimum index of the strength value As an elongation of 8 per cent in 2 inches is required. also required, there must necessarily be an upper limit to the hardness. On the steel used for shrapnel, which is generally about 50-point carbon and 60-point manganese, the maximum hardness should not be over 60 on the
scleroscope.
49
Tests relating to Heat-treatment of Shells. In the number of MACHINERY, Mr. J. M. Wilson, September, 1915, who has been actively engaged in heat-treating shells since the beginning of the war, and who has had to rely entirely upon his own resources in meeting and overcoming the troubles which seemed to arise on all sides, relates the
results of his experiments.
The British government shell specifications call for a yield point or elastic limit, after heat-treating, of not less
than 36 tons per square inch, a breaking point or ultimate
Machinery
Fig. 11.
Cross-sectional
A, B,
showing Points and C where Tests are made, and one of the Tensile Test Samples
of Shrapnel Shell
View
strength not less than 56 tons per square inch, and an inch. elongation not less than 8 per cent in Officially there is no maximum specified for either of those three physical characteristics ; but as a matter of fact any unusual condition which is not in conformity with recognized metallurgical practice may cause the chief government inspector for the district in which the manufacturer is located Reference has been made to certain to reject a shipment. points in the shell which must resist the strains due to The nature of these strains and condition of the firing. steel best suited to meet them will be understood from Fig. 11, which shows a cross-section of the British 18pound shrapnel shell. When a shell is fired from a gun, the base A is subjected to a blow, i. e., a sudden increase of pressure which almost instantly attains a maximum of from 12 to 14 tons per square inch, and imparts the initial The shell, being a body at rest, opvelocity to the shell.
50
poses this velocity with its own inertia, the result being that both compressive and tensile strains are set up in the The shell body assumes the conditions of a shell body. column which has a compressive load varying from noth-
ing at the nose to a maximum at the base. The tensile load is due to the inertia of the bullets inside the shell.
These bullets are subject to an increasing compressive load from the top down, the resultant strain being a bursting effort which attains a maximum in the region of the point
as the "set-up point." the time required for the fuse to act has elapsed, the powder charge is exploded, and the contents of the shell are blown forward in the usual manner. The contents are released either by the stripping of the thread of the brass socket, or else the walls of the shell yield at the point C, opening the threads sufficiently to free the socket. At A, (the base) the shell must be perfectly sound and free from flaws such as minute cracks, etc., which may allow the
B,
known
When
flame from the firing charge to strike through with disastrous results to the shell and gun. The metal in the base must not be too hard or it may fracture under the pressure of the explosion, and it must not be too soft or it may At the point B flatten out and spoil the rifling in the bore. there is no maximum requirement so far as tensile strength is concerned, but any abnormal strength is viewed with suspicion unless it is accompanied by a generous elongation. At B the metal is particularly liable to distension while the
shell is acquiring velocity, and unless the shell is strong enough to resist the sudden bursting strain, and the amount
of elongation is sufficient to cushion or absorb this strain at the instant of firing, the shell is liable to take a permanent set in the region of point B, with results mentioned above, The shell must not be too hard at the point C as it may burst, thus neutralizing the real object of a shrapnel shell which is to project the bullets forward with increased
velocity at the predetermined instant, being in fact an aerial gun arranged to discharge its contents at any desired point
of
its flight.
51
Having these reUniformity of Steel for Shrapnel. quirements firmly established in his mind, the heat-treating expert is now confronted with a double problem: How is it possible to give steel the suitable strength and having done so, how is it possible to know that the desired result has been obtained, without actually making test pieces from each shell. The principal condition upon which successful Carbon heat-treating depends is uniformity of material. and manganese are the principal substances which influence the results. The exact composition of steel specified by the government is not given to any manufacturers other than steelmakers. It is, however, generally understood to be a 0.50 per cent carbon, 0.60 per cent manganese steel. Allowing five points variation in carbon and ten points variation in manganese, the requirements would be approximately 0.45 to 0.55 per cent carbon and 0.50 to 0.70 per cent manganese. In one carload of forgings, one firm received shells from 23 different heats or melts, with carbon
;
varying from 0.60 to 0.47 per cent, and manganese varying from 0.63 to 0.49 per cent, with all possible combinations and proportions between these limits. The number of forgings supplied from each heat varied from one up to 1200 so that the question of determining the best temperature for each carbon content was indeed quite impracticable. Many manufacturers at the present moment may be in a similar position, and the gravity of the situation, both from
a financial and a military point of view, may justify a detailed description of the method which was followed in treating shells of such varying composition. It is generally known to manufacResults of Tests. turers that the highest tensile strength of steel is obtained by cooling it rapidly from a temperature slightly higher than the decalescent point or critical temperature. The degree of hardness resulting from this operation can be ascertained quickly, accurately, and repeatedly by means The degree of hardness thus shown is of the scleroscope. indication of the probable strength of the matea reliable rial; that is to say, after making due allowance for different makes of steel and varying proportions of the principal
somewhat
52
constituents, the scleroscope readings are a reliable indication of the results which may be expected when a tensile
In the opening months of test is made of any given shell. the shell business, considerable reliance was placed on the accurate determination of the decalescence point. Forgings of varying analysis were received; the carbon being from 0.48 to 0.53 per cent, and the manganese from 0.54 to 0.69 per cent. All steels whose composition was within those limits showed a decalescence point of between 1390 and 1425 degrees F., and when quenched in water at 50 degrees F. above the decalescence point, such steels would have a scleroscope hardness number as high as 85; but when quenched in ordinary fish oil the hardness was only slightly over 50, the sample being 1 inch square and Vs
TABLE
I.
RESULTS OF TESTS TO DETERMINE THE BEST QUENCHING MEDIUM FOR SHRAPNEL SHELLS
Quenching
temperature, degrees F.
53
forgings were received from a certain heat, which would not respond to treatment based upon the results of preliminary experiments. Investigation yielded the results presented in Table II. While water-treatment of the forgings from "Heat No. 3" gave satisfactory strengths under test, the liability of shells to crack, owing to their thin
TABLE
II.
RESULTS OF TESTS CONDUCTED TO SECURE GENERAL DATA

01T
HE AT- TREATMENT
Heat No.
54
already stated. If, when fulfilling these requirements, the treatment should prove detrimental to the shell in other respects, then it must be changed accordingly. Referring to results presented in Table II, "Heat No. 3," it will be observed that the manganese is only 0.47 per cent with carbon 0.50 per cent. Comparing "Heat No. 3" with "Heat No. 1", it is evident that an increase of 5 points carbon is more than -offset by a reduction of 21 points in the manganese. Increase of temperature seemed to offer
the greatest possibilities and sample shells were drawn every 121/2 degrees up to 1675 degrees F. The greatest hardness was obtained at 1637^, scleroscope readings of from 50 to 55 being the average. This was not considered
TABLE
III.
RESULTS OF TESTS ON SAMPLES TAKEN FROM A SHELL WITH A SCLEROSCOPE HARDNESS NUMBER OF FROM 48 TO 52
Heat No.

:
55
hardness on the scleroscope. Then (a) If, for every point of carbon below 50, there be present 1 or more points of manganese above 50, the steel should harden satisfactorily at 1600 degrees F. (b) If, for every point of manganese below 50, there be present 2 or more points of carbon above 50, the steel should harden satisfactorily at 1600 degrees F. (c) If both carbon and manganese be below 0.50 per
0.45
ACTUAL LIMITS OF MANGANESE, PER CENT

Fig.
12.
Machinery
Chart showing Hardening Temperatures for Various Percentages of Carbon and Manganese in Steel used for Shrapnel Shells
cent, increase the hardening temperature 12% degrees F. for each point of manganese short of 50, and 6*4 degrees F. for each point of carbon short of 50. (d) If both carbon and manganese are above 0.50 per cent, a hardness number above 55 will probably be obtained at a quenching temperature of 1600 degrees F., but the maximum hardness,
56
i. e., from 75 to 80, will be obtained at a somewhat lower temperature, the exact temperature being most easily found by starting at 1500 degrees F. and trying a couple of sample shells every 25 degrees F. until a maximum hardness
is obtained. Forgings containing from 0.50 to 0.55 per cent carbon and from 0.54 to 0.62 per cent manganese in
any varying proportions may be hardened at 1600 degrees F. to show a hardness number of from 55 to 75 and when tempered to give a hardness number of from 48 to 52 they
;
will yield the following results: yield point, 45 to 50 tons; breaking point, 65 to 70 tons ; and elongation, 14 to 20 per
cent.
Looking back, (c) offers a basis for charting the hardening points in a fairly approximate manner, to form a guide as to where the best hardness may be obtained. Such a chart is shown in Fig. 12. By following the horizontal and vertical lines from the carbon and manganese content until they intersect, a diagonal line will be found which will indicate the temperature at or about which the maximum hardness will be obtained. This does not prevent the use of 1600 degrees F. as the average temperature for the majority of shells, provided they are strong enough when hardened at that temperature; but where shells do not harden satisfactorily at 1600 degrees F., the chart offers an alternative method subject to such variation as may arise due to the use of steel from different makers, etc. Probably the best practice is to make careful scleroscope readings of each piece before pulling. Care must be taken to have a uniform surface on both sides, all tool marks being removed with fine emery cloth. The points tested are shown at A, B, and C in Fig. 11. After the test piece is made, the value of the hardness number increases as a result of the piece being solidly supported in the scleroscope, whereas, when the reading is made on the shell, the arched form of the wall acts as a spring, and absorbs the shock to some extent. Readings thus increase from 2 to 10 after the test piece is finished. points A careful study of the data presented in Table IV reveals the fact that results are not always consistent. With

TABLE
IV.
57
DATA ON THE HEAT-TREATMENT AND STRENGTH TESTS OF SHRAPNEL SHELLS
Carbon,
per cent
58
*J
siLLJ
59
on a canvas buffing wheel around the outside of B, Fig. Readings by the sclero11, for a width of at least 1 inch. inch wide, and if they are are made on a zone scope between 46 and 52 the shell may be relied upon to show
good results in the tensile

is
;
test.
In making test pieces,
it
desirable to cut the piece from a spot which reads 48 to 50 and in machining the test piece, care should be taken to remove an equal quantity of metal from either side of
the wall so that the test piece is a true specimen of the Where a shell is carelessly average wall structure. and the test piece so machined that the surface quenched, on one side is practically the same as the inner side of the wall, the results would not be a true indication of the real average strength, and a lot of shells might possibly be rejected on account of a slight oversight in this respect. Reference has been made to the base A, Fig. 11. Forging defects show up here occasionally and in such cases the These flaws take the form of shell is at once condemned. small cracks, from the width of a hair up to 1/16 inch. They seldom can be detected until after heat-treating, and are most easily observed by polishing the base on a disk Losses in this respect vary, but might average grinder. about 0.20 per cent. The hardness of the base itself may vary from 38 to 50, which insures an ample degree of toughness and avoids all possibility of the shell cracking
under
fire.
Many methods of heating, Heat-treating Department. quenching, annealing, and cleaning are in use by the For rapidity of different firms engaged in shell making. output, cleanliness of the resulting product, ease and economy of operation, and uniformity and control of results, the lead bath seems best for hardening, and the semi-muffle furnace for annealing. In one case the use of a lead bath
by a skilled operator yielded excellent results both as to economy and uniformity, but, when the output exceeds
500 shells per 12 hours, a semi-continuous furnace meets the requirements to better advantage. The lay-out of a hardening room for an output of 12,000 shells per week The lead baths consist of a rectanis given in Fig. 13.
60
gular pot of suitable capacity, resting on a 4i/2-mch hearth built of common firebrick and heated by either oil or gas burners below the hearth. They are built in pairs with a common wall between, which is thick enough to provide a flue to carry off products of combustion. The quenching tanks are rectangular, water- jacketed, and provided with two quenching cradles each. These cradles are arranged to swing lengthwise in the tank, and, when the carrier hold-
MacMnery
Fig.
14.
Special
Arrangement
Shrapnel
of Scleroscope for Testing
Shells
ing the shell is lowered into the oil, a pipe is automatically extended downward into the shell and introduces cold oil in the inside of the shell, while the operator swings the cradle back and forth in the tank, thus cooling the outside This method of quenching of the shell at the same time. made it possible to harden shells which, by reason of low carbon and manganese, defied all conventional methods of dipping and swinging back and forth with tongs. The

output per
61
man
with this apparatus
is
largely in excess of
any hand method, while the uniformity and degree of

that could be desired. the oil from a depth of 6 inches below the surface and pumps it through 100 feet of 1-inch copper pipe arranged in two 50-foot coils in parallel. The cooled oil is delivered into an overhead reservoir, the overis all
hardness
The
oil
pump draws
flow being connected to both tanks equally. After quenching, the shells are set on draining racks, and then washed in boiling water and sal-soda, placed on another draining
tempering.
rack and then brushed with wire brushes previous to The tempering furnace is of rectangular form,
Fig.
15.
Closing
in
Nose
of Shrapnel
Shell
in
Hydraulic Press
and consists of a long flat hearth with rails laid lengthwise on it. At each end a space is partitioned off from the body of the furnace, by means of vertical sliding doors; and a rack holding a number of shells is deposited on the rails at the front end of the hearth, the door is elevated and the rack is slid into the main chamber. After a suitable lapse of time another rack is introduced, and so on until the first rack is ejected at the rear end of the furnace. The shells are now hot enough to loosen all foreign matter on the surface, and a few seconds brushing with a wire brush cleans out the driving band groove, and leaves the shell
62
with a delicate brown oxidized finish. The shell is now spotted on three places with a canvas buff and tested for
hardness.
roscope.
Fig.
The
shell
14 shows the arrangement of the scleis supported on a single narrow
V-block with hardened edges, situated immediately under the set-up point. A narrow strip supports the open end of the shell, thus giving a three-point support, while a vertical stop at the back of the shell maintains it in a position tangential to the radius of the swinging arm. The usual rubber bulb was soon dispensed with as being quite unsuited
Fig.
16.
Third Operation on Nose of Shrapnel Shell and Threading
Turning, Facing,
for such hard service, and a small pump cylinder substituted. The piston in the cylinder is operated by a downward pressure of the heel on the pedal to give compression, and a spring inside the cylinder gives the necessary pull when the scleroscope hammer is to be raised by suction. After being tested the shells are ready for "nosing in."
shells, particularly
On some makes of of the Shell. the British, the nose is closed in before performing the third series of machining operations. The closing-in is generally accomplished in a hydraulic or power
Closing-in the
End
63
Fig. 17.
Grinding Shrapnel Shells In One Operation Fn a Ford-Smith Grinding Machine carrying a Wheel about 8^ Inches Wide by 20 Inches In Diameter, rotated at 1200 Revolutions per Minute
Fig.
18.
with Six Dies, as shown

there
Closing
in
Copper Band on Shrapnel Shell in a Machine provided in Fig. 20, back of each one of which
is
Hydraulic Cylinder
64
press.
formed
Fig. 15 shows the closing-in operation being perin a vertical hydraulic press capable of exerting a pressure of 800 pounds per square inch. Before closing
the open end of the shell, it is heated in the lead bath, shown to the left of the illustration, which is kept at a temperature between 1450 and 1500 degrees F. The steel diaphragm, which is larger in diameter than the nose of the shell, is first thrown in. Then the shell is placed in the press, and a cone-shaped die descends, closing in the nose to the proper shape and diameter. The third machining operation consists in finishing the radius on the nose, both inside and outside, and cutting the thread. This is
Machinery
Fig. 19.
Special
Wheel-truing Device used on Ford-Smith Grinding Machine shown in Fig. 17
Type
of
an ordinary engine lathe with is done with cutters held in boring-bars and the thread cut with a Geometric The thread on the 18-pounder is 2.94 collapsible tap.
done, as
shown
in Fig. 16, in
a turret on the saddle.
The boring
inches in diameter, 14-pitch, Whitworth type. The exterior surface of a Grinding Shrapnel Shells. shell is straight for a portion of the length and shrapnel then curved on the nose. While the limits required are
not extremely close, it is necessary, where large production is required, to accomplish the finishing operations on the exterior of the shell in some way by which fairly close
65
dimensions can be secured as well as large production. Grinding has, therefore, been recommended for finishing
One method of grinding shrapnel the exterior of the shell. in which a wide-faced wheel is used that covers the shells, entire ground surface, is shown in Fig. 17. This machine is built by the Ford-Smith Machine Co., Hamilton, Ont., and carries a wheel about 8*4 inches wide by 20 inches in diameter. The grinding wheel is rotated at 1200 R. P. M.,
and the work at 50 R. P. M. The depth of the cut is about 1/32 inch, and the time to complete one shell varies between two and three minutes. For grinding, a plug is
Fig. 20.
Close
View showing Closing-in Dies Machine shown in Fig. 18
of
Banding
screwed into the open end of the shell. This is held on the tailstock center and a chuck holds and drives the shell from the other end. It is necessary, of course, that the wheel be kept the correct shape, and for this purpose an interesting type of
wheel-truing device, differing considerably from that shown in Fig. 17, is now used. Referring to Fig. 19, it will be seen that this comprises a combination wheel guard and bracket, the latter being used as a base for the wheel-truing device proper. The diamond A is carried in a holder B that operates in a slide in the face of the traversing wheeltruing slide C. The diamond holder carries a cam point
66

which
is
kept in contact with the guide or former cam E The wheel-truing slide C is traversed by a triple pitch screw G so as to give a rapid movement to the slide in order to produce what might be termed a "rough-truing" of the wheel. For change in diameter, and also for bringing the diamond in contact with the wheel, a vertical slide is provided that is operated by handle /. In order to observe the diamond when truing the wheel, a trap door J is provided in the wheel guard, which can be dropped down into place when the actual grinding of the
by means of a spring F.
shell is
being done. In order to rotate the Pressing on the Rifling Band. shrapnel when propelling it out of the howitzer, it is necessary to put on a rifling band to take the rifling grooves of the gun bore. As a rule, these rifling bands are made
from copper tubing and are simply cut off in a hand screw machine or turret lathe. The next operation is to close in the rifling band on the shrapnel shell. The ring is dropped over the shell and a fixture is used to locate it in the correct
relation to the groove in the circumference of the shell. Then a slight pressure is exerted on it to align it properly
shown
now placed in the banding machine This particular machine is provided with six dies as shown in Fig. 20, and back of each one is a hydraulic cylinder operated by water pressure. Two squeezers are necessary to close the rifling band properly into the groove, the shell being given a half turn after each
in the groove. in Fig.
It is 18.
squeeze.
There are several different machines on the market for performing this closing-in operation on the rifling band. Another machine, built by the West Tire Setter Co., RochesThe principle upon which ter, N. Y., is shown in Fig. 21. this machine operates is almost identical with that previously described, but in this case oil is used as a pressure medium. It is forced into the machine by means of a beltdriven pump shown to the left of the illustration, which drives the oil from the oil tank and carries it to the center of the base of the press. An oil head is located at this
point
from which the pipes are run
to each of the six
rams
67
Fig. 21.
Shrapnel Banding Machine built by the West Tire Setter Co., having a Capacity for Compressing two Bands per Minute
Fig. 22.
Assembling Bullets, Resin, and Fuse Socket
in
Shrapnel Shell
68
or cylinders. The amount of pressure required for compressing the copper band depends largely upon the width and thickness and the amount that the band must be spread to fill the grooves, rather than upon the diameter of the shell. The machine shown in Fig. 21 is capable of exerting a pressure of 30 tons on each cylinder or a combined pressure of 180 tons on all six cylinders. It has a capacity for compressing at least two bands per minute. One method of machinMachining the Rifling Band. ing the rifling band to the correct shape is shown in Fig.
Fig. 23.
Finishing Rifling Band on Shrapnel Shell to Shape

is
23.
Here a Fox lathe
used which
is
provided with a
in the turret
chuck for holding the
shell
and which carries
a revolving center for additionally supporting it. The machining is done by form tools which are of the correct Before any other machining operations can be acshape. complished it is necessary to put in the tin powder cup, This cup is slipped brass fuse tube, bullets, and resin. in past the steel diaphragm, then both parts are allowed to drop to the bottom and the fuse tube is screwed into the diaphragm. The required number of lead bullets, which
70
for the British 18-pound shrapnel is about 375 per shell, The bullets are held in a tank and are is then poured in. allowed to flow out upon the opening of a stopcock. In order to pack the bullets solidly, a compressed air ramming device forms the base upon which the shell rests while the This is operated three or four bullets are being poured in. times for the filling of each shell and arranges the bullets
compactly.
is now poured in, as shown in the center of This is carried in the tank which is heated by a gas furnace and is poured in almost level with the top of the bullets. The shell is then placed on the scale in the immediate foreground and weighed. One dram plus or minus is allowed as a variation, and in order to not exceed this,
The
resin
Fig. 22.
Fig.
25.
18-pound Shrapnel Shell showing Dimensions and Manufacturing Limits
poured in until the correct weight is is now screwed in as shown to the left of the illustration, and upon the completion of this operation the shell is ready for the fourth and This last operation consists in last machining operation. the brass socket on the outside diameter to conmachining form to the radius on the nose of the shell, and boring on the inside and threading to fit the fuse body. These operations are handled in a Fox brass working lathe. Upon the completion of the machining operations the plug is screwed in, the shell stamped, cleaned, weighed, and inspected by government inspectors. After this, the shell is given two coats of paint and a red band is painted around the nose. It is now packed in boxes holding six shells
obtained.
more or
less resin is
The brass fuse socket
71
Fig. 26.
Group
of Gages made by Wells Bros. Co. for gaging British Shrapnel Shells and Parts
and is ready for shipment. ture of the shrapnel shell.

Gaging Shrapnel
Shells.
This completes the manufac-
The machining operations on

closely.
shrapnel shells are required to be held within certain limits,
and government inspectors watch these
Some
shell
of
the principal gaging operations on the shrapnel
body
Machinery
Fig. 27.
Diagram showing Application
of Wells Bros.
Gages
72
Fig. 28.
Collection of Wells Bros. Co.'s
American Shrapnel
Shell
Gages
Fig. 25 shows the 18-pound shrapnel and gives the principal dimensions together with the limits it will be seen from this illustration that the range allowable is in most cases large. The Wells Bros. Co., Greenfield, Mass., has made a large number of shrapnel gages, some of which are shown in the accompanying illustrations. In the three upper views of Fig. 24, the Wells
are
shown
in Fig. 24.
shell in section,
Bros, standard thread gage is illustrated. This is used for all diameter measurements by substituting flat gaging pins for the V-points used when gaging thread diameters.
Fig. 26 illustrates for gaging such parts of the British shrapnel typical gages
Gages
for British Shrapnel Parts.
Fig.
29.
Dwight-Slate
Hand-operated Marking Machine
for Shrapnel Shells

as body diameters,
73
diaphragm seat, powder pocket, fuse thread diameters, and fuse parts. Fig. 27 shows socket, the application of several different types of shrapnel shell gages. At A is the gage for the over-all length. At B is the gage used for measuring the thickness of the closed end. The outer arm of this gage can be swung away to allow the placing of the gage on the standard. At the extreme lower lefthand corner of the gaging arm is a slight shoulder on the rod and the height of this acts as the limit. C shows the application of outside diameter and thread gages. D
shows
three form
gages for checking the shape and dimensions of the wave ribs, the diameter and shape of the undercut i n t h e band groove, and the shape of the nose of
the
shell.
shows
the gage used for

checking the thickness of the wall of the shell
at
different distances
from the mouth. F Fig. 30. Power-driven Dwight-Slate Markshows the application ing Machine for Shrapnel Shells of a powder pocket gage, and also a gage for checking the
shape of the finished rifling band. Gages for American Shrapnel Shells. Fig. 28 shows a miscellaneous collection of gages used in checking the dimensions of the American shrapnel shell. Gages, A, B, C, and D are for measuring the diameter of the diaphragm E is for checking the distance from the diaphragm seat. seat to the mouth end of the shell, and gage F is for the
74
Gage G is used for the band groove. Gages H and / are for the thread in the mouth of the shell, H being a "not-go" and / a "go"
outside diameter of the shell.
rifling
gage.
The gage at J performs several gaging functions on the American shell. It consists of a standard having two upright posts across which a bar is mounted. The purpose of the bar is to gage the over-all length of the shell, and its lower surface is provided with two steps giving the limits. This gage is also used for measuring the depth of the powder pocket, rod K and block L performing this function. Two rings are cut around the rod K registering with the top surface of the bar, the purpose being to show the accuracy of the work.
Another interesting gage is shown at M. This is for gaging the concentricity of the shell and consists of an arbor mounted so that it can be swung on a pivot. The and O that fit in the shell. arbor carries two collars Collar P is merely a sizing plug and when the gage is in use this plug is removed. A gaging finger Q rests against the shell when it is on this arbor, and a standard type of indicator R shows the variation in concentricity when the gage, collars, and shell are rotated on the arbor.
Marking Shrapnel
Shells.
All
shrapnel
shells
are
marked on
lettering, as
their circumference with five or six lines of
shown in Fig. 29. This indicates the size of the shell, the series, muzzle velocity, name of the manufacTwo types of machines for turer, date completed, etc. the stamping, built by Noble & Westbrook, Hartproducing The machine ford, Conn., are shown in Figs. 29 and 30. The figure in Fig. 29 is of the hand-operated type. shown A is held in a slide that is moved longitudinally by block pulling down handle B, rolling the shell, and at the same time stamping it. The shell is located on the table in the
two positions by gages C and D. The "Dwight-Slate" stamping machine shown in Fig. 30 is power-driven, and the work is held on an elevating table. The stamp is held in a slide operated by an eccentric and connecting-rod. In this machine the shell is not distorted.
CHAPTER
IV
MACHINES AND TOOLS FOR SHRAPNEL MANUFACTURE

Equipment for Machining Forged In machining the 18-pound British Shrapnel shrapnel shell on the equipment furnished by the ReedPrentice Co., Worcester, Mass., eight distinct operations are performed as follows: First, drilling a center hole in the closed end of the forging in a Prentice 16-inch ballbearing sensitive drilling machine equipped with a special centering fixture second, rough-turning the outside diameter, grooving, squaring the closed end and rounding the corners in a Reed-Prentice 14-inch heavy type automatic lathe; third, machining the powder pocket and diaphragm seat, as well as the internal and external diameters of the nose in a 14-inch Reed extra-heavy turret lathe; fourth, under-cutting band grooves and producing wave ribs in a 14-inch Reed engine lathe; fifth, boring, reaming, threading and facing the open end in a Reed 14-inch extra-heavy turret lathe; sixth, finish-turning outside diameter and radius on nose, also form-turning copper band in a Reed
Shells.
;
Reed-Prentice
Co.
14-inch heavy type automatic lathe; seventh, cutting off center projection on closed end of shell in a Reed 14-inch engine lathe; eighth, finishing brass socket to form, clean-
ing inside of socket and cutting off excess length of tube in a Reed 14-inch extra-heavy turning lathe. The drilling First Operation on Rough Shell Forging. of the center hole in the closed end of the forging is a
comparatively simple operation, and is performed in an interesting fixture held on a 16-inch Prentice ball-bearing This fixture, which is designed sensitive drilling machine.
for handling the work quickly, is shown in Fig. 1, and consists of the base casting A clamped to the table of the drilling machine. The entire back part of the jig swings on the trunnion B to provide a means for quickly removing
the forging C from the arbor D. locking pin E is used for locating the fixture in its upright position for drilling.
75
76
SHRAPNEL MANUFACTURE
Machinery
Fig.
1.
drilling
Fixtures used for holding Shrapnel Shell Forgings when Center Hole in a 16-inch Prentice Ball Bearing
Sensitive Drilling
Machine
Bushing
in the top plate

drill
of the fixture guides the

is
combination
and countersink.
of the work-holding arbor
The construction
This arbor of special attention. has a cap on its top end that acts as a stop for the inside of the forging, which,
worthy
77
in being placed over the arbor, is located centrally and clamped by fingers N. To operate these fingers, hand lever / is depressed, and as this is fulcrumed at the point J, it causes collar K to rise on the arbor. Yoke L forms a connection between the lever and the collar with which the
is integral. sleeve carrying fingers crumed in arbor and are thrown
Fingers
are ful-
outward
forging
when
sleeve
to grip the
is
raised.
Light springs
tend
to keep the gripping fingers in a vertical position against
Fig.
2.
Tool Lay-out for performing Second Series of Operations on Reed- Prentice Heavy Type Automatic Lathe
the arbor when they are not being forced outward by the Handle / carries a spring inclined "surf aces on sleeve M. stationary while the forging pawl P that holds the sleeve
is
being center-drilled. Second or Rough-turning and Facing Operations. The second operation is performed on a Reed-Prentice 14-inch heavy type automatic lathe, as shown in Figs. 2
The forging A is held on an internal expanding 3. arbor B, the driving part of which is supported by the head-center. At the closed end, the shell is steadied Dy tne
and
78
tail-center.
The bottom of the shell rests against the end of the arbor which acts as a gage. In this setting, the external diameter of the forging is rough-turned by four
tools F, mounted on the carriage G. This carriage has a travel slightly less than two inches, and an automatic throw-
tools,
provided at the end of the cut that disengages the draws them back and returns the carriage. At the rear of the carriage on this machine a facing arm is mounted on a heavy bar. Turning tools are carried on this facing arm, as shown, and when the front carriage
off is
Fig.
3.
Section
through
Reed-Prentice Automatic Tool Arrangement
Lathe, showing
feeds longitudinally a cam bracket O, bolted to the carriage, is carried along with it. Clamped on this bracket is an
held in place by screws. Cam roll on adjustable cam the facing arm contacts with cam N, causing the facing arm to rock forward as the carriage travels longitudinally. Referring to the plan view in Fig. 2, tool H, held in the arm, faces the end of the forging, tool I chamfers the corner, and tool / cuts the depression for the wave ribs, leaving a projection in the center from which the ribs are formed. It should be understood that the tools on the
carriage and facing arm work together. two of these machines without trouble.
ries of operations
79
One man can run
Third Series of Machining Operations. The third seon the shrapnel forging is performed on a 14-inch Reed heavy lathe with a specially large turret, as shown in Fig. 4. This lathe is fitted with a 12-inch bored out to 3^ inches to permit the three-jaw chuck,
forging to extend into it. The forging A is put in the chuck as shown at B, and the jaws grip at C. The first operation is performed with a bar D carrying a blade cutter E that rough-bores the powder pocket, and tool F that
Machinery
Fig.
4.
Tooling Equipment for performing Third Series of Operations on 14-inch Extra-heavy Turret Lathe
rough-bores the mouth. The turret is now indexed, and a boring-bar carrying a blade G roughs out the diaphragm faces the shell to length. seat, while an auxiliary tool At the next indexing of the turret the boring-bar / that carries the finishing tool / finishes the diaphragm seat and powder chamber. Fourth Operation Under-cutting and "Waving" Band For the fourth operation, the forging is held in Groove. a 14-inch Reed engine lathe provided with an automatic attachment for under-cutting and waving the ribs for the
8 3
Oô
*Q}
-^
K^ CO
s
Jr*
O
hjQ
BQ
JjS
SH
.3
o;
02
QJ
rQ
2
3
-g
lll
2
0>
ft ^j
I IM ~ 5.S
0)
.
H
a>
_f>
-J3
+3
n) 02
.2
o'o
|a-g
O o
80
j-H
s
*^j
CH
.S !^ ^2
B.
is
81
slide of the
Spring
keeps the
roll
on the lower
slot in
cam-plate F that fastened to carriage R. When the carriage is traversed toward the chuck, the irregular surface of cam-plate F engages the roll and forces the tool-holder forward. Side motion to produce the wave is then effected by face-cam G, mounted on the chuck and contacting with the roll H. This roll is supported on a bracket forming an auxiliary slide S that carries the waving tool C. A stiff barrel spring keeps slide S in contact with the cam G. Thus, when the machine spindle revolves, the auxiliary slide is caused to oscillate back and forth far enough to give the desired
tool-holder in contact with the
cam
amount of wave. The under-cutting in the band groove is accomplished by tools / and / which are mounted on separate tool-slides K and L. These slides are fed in at an angle to the axis of the forging, against the action of coil springs and N, and P work. by the cam surfaces of plate Q in which rolls
Plate Q is bolted to carriage R which, in advancing toward the chuck, forces in the under-cutting tools in the manner The tail-center of this machine is fitted just described. with a quick-acting mechanism so that it may be withdrawn quickly to insert a new piece. Fifth Series of Operations. Before performing the fifth series of operations, the forging is heated and closed in on the nose. It is then handled in the following manner: Reed 14-inch heavy lathe, equipped with an extra large turret mounted on a special wide-bridge carriage carries
tools for boring,
reaming, threading and
final
squaring
of the open end, as for these operations
in Fig. 6. The shell forging is held in a three-jaw chuck provided
shown
with special jaws. In the first position the rough-boring of the nose and the rough-facing of the extreme end is performed with tools B and C. The turret is then indexed and tools Z), and E finish-ream the hole in the nose and face the end. The tap F is next brought into position, cutting the thread in the nose. The turret is again indexed, bringing a special form boring tool into position. Here the boring tool G is carried in
82
83
held in a holder of the cross-sliding carriage type a bar that is fastened to two faces of the turret. By means of cross-screw /, the boring tool may be drawn in or out at
This tool operates as follows: As the turret is advanced, handle / is operated to let tool G enter the nose of the shell, and, upon the continued advance of the turret, is forced in between and gripped by the finarrow head gers N. The turret is now backed away from the chuck, and while receding acts upon slide P through the medium
will.
Fig.
7.
Reed-Prentice 14-inch Heavy Type Automatic Lathe used for performing Sixth Series of Operations
of roll
groove R
groove R. The plate containing cam and consequently attached to the arrow head is held stationary while the turret is being withdrawn from the work. This backward movement of the turret is continued until the tool G is withdrawn from the work and slide S comes in contact with check-nuts on rod 0,
is
L and cam
and allowing from fingers the turret to be indexed ready for the first operation on the next forging. The sixth series of Sixth or Finish-turning Operations. is performed on a Reed-Prentice 14-inch heavy operations type automatic lathe, similar to that used for the second
withdrawing arrow head
84
operation, and the machine is also operated in a manner similar to that previously described. The operations consist in finish-turning the outside diameter of the shell and turning the radius on the nose. In addition, the copper
put on previous to this operation, is turned to shape. Referring to Fig. 7, the shrapnel shell A is held by the tail-center at one end and is supported and driven from the other end by a plug screwed into it. This plug is held on the live center and is driven by an equalizing driver, coming in contact with pins in the special faceplate.
rifling band,
Machinery
Fig.
8.
Tools for machining Brass Fuse Socket on 14-inch Heavy Turning Lathe Eighth Operation
and C are carried on the front of the carSlide C carries three tools D; two of these start in riage. from the rifling band and turn in toward the nose, and the other works up toward the rifling band from the closed end. Tool E, carried in slide B, turns the curve on the nose of the shell and is controlled in its action by means of a slot in cam F in which a roller held to the slide operslides
ates. At the rear of the carriage is carried a facing bar attachment, as previously described in connection with the second operation. This attachment carries three tools, as illustrated, for machining the rifling band to shape, facing the closed end and chamfering the corner.
Two
Seventh and Eighth Operations.
85
After the sixth oper-
ation, the fuse tube is threaded into the diaphragm, the bullets put in, and the hot resin poured in to keep them
The brass socket is then screwed into the rattling. nose and the fuse tube soldered to it. The shell is now ready for the seventh operation which consists in cuttingoff the center projection. This is accomplished in a Reed 14-inch engine lathe, provided with a faceplate chuck for holding and driving the shell at the open end, and a steadyrest for supporting it close to the point where the cutting is being done. The shell is now ready for the eighth operation, which consists in machining the brass socket to shape
from
'aohlnery
Fig.
Shrapnel Case made from Chrome-nickel Steel having High Tensile Strength on a Cleveland Automatic Screw Machine with Special Tool Equipment
9.
an extra-heavy lathe as shown in Fig. 8. The tools used for machining are retained in a special holder on the Tool A, which is used for facing off the fuse carriage. tube and the brass socket, is inverted, starts at the center and is fed out toward the circumference. The external surface of the socket is machined with a circular forming The inward tool C held on a stud D located in block B.
in
travel of this tool
is
limited by stop
coming
in contact
with the
shell.
Making Shrapnel Shells on the Cleveland Automatic. An unusual example of automatic machine work is that of producing the shrapnel shell shown in Fig. 9. This shell
86
is
made from a bar of 3 1/16-inch chrome-nickel steel stock. The steel has a tensile strength varying from 125,000 to 135,000 pounds per square inch, and is extremely tough.
Fig. 10.
Order of Operations on the Shrapnel Case
The work is accomplished on a 314-inch Cleveland automatic, and the tooling equipment, as shown in Figs. 10, 11, and 12, is interesting. While the general operation of the
Cleveland automatic
is
well understood by
many
mechanics,
87
the production of this piece illustrates a number of points in the operation of this machine which are not so well known.
Therefore,
it is
interesting job
is
advisable to explain in detail just handled.
how
this
The first operation, as the job was originally laid out, was to feed the stock out to the stop A, shown in Fig. 11, which is held on the cross-slide and operated by a lever on the base of the machine. This method has been improved upon since the photograph shown in Fig. 11 was taken, and the time reduced from twenty-seven and onehalf minutes to twenty-five minutes
(see Fig. 10 for im-
Fig. 11.
Cleveland 3V4-inch Automatic Screw Machine set up making a Shrapnel Case In Twenty-five Minutes
for
proved method). The second operation is to rough-drill the large hole with an inserted bit B, step the hole for the taper reamer with cutter C and rough-turn the external held in a special turning attachdiameter with cutter ment. This attachment envelops the shanks of all six tools in the turret in order to obtain support. The cutters in the attachment shown in Fig. 11 work in advance of the
shown in Fig. 12, which is under-cutting forming tool held on the rear cross-slide. The time required for the completion of the operations outlined is thirteen minutes.
a if
89
In the third operation drill H finishes the powder pocket, and two cutters / counterbore for the tap time required three minutes. The fourth operation consists in finishing the diaphragm seat with the counterbore /, finishing the front end with inserted cutter K and breaking the corner
to facilitate tapping with inserted cutter L, the time required being forty-five seconds. In the fifth operation the in fortyheld in the tap-holder thread is cut with a tap
Then the turret is indexed and for the sixth operation the hole is taper-reamed with reamer O, provided with four inserted "Novo" steel blades, in ninety seconds. The last and seventh operation consists in knurling the band with a knurl P (see Fig. 12) mounted on the front cross-slide, and cutting off the shell with a cut-off blade Q retained in a holder on the rear cross-slide time six minfive seconds.
utes. The total time required to produce this shrapnel case by the improved methods illustrated by the diagram in Fig. 10 is twenty-five minutes. There are several points of unusual interest in the production of this shrapnel case. One is the large amount of
stock to be removed to form the hole the second is the long taper-reaming operation difficult work to accomplish satand the third isfactorily on an automatic screw machine is the long outside forming operation which must be held In order to acto a limit of 0.0005 inch on the diameter. this last operation successfully, the external diamcomplish eter of the piece is first turned with a cutter held in a separate turning attachment, leaving only 0.010 inch on the diameter to be removed by a wide under-cutting or shaving Not only tool E held very rigidly on the rear cross-slide. must the case be exact as regards diameter, but it must not vary f om one end to the other nor at any point through;
out
its
manner
The large shaving tool held rigidly in the length. illustrated in Fig. 12 accomplishes this result sat-
isfactorily.
The material from which the case is made is so tough that some difficulty was met with in selecting a tool steel that would stand up for a reasonable length of time under The drills and counterbores are tipped with "Novo" cut.
90
cutters and all the forming tools, including the cut-off tool, are also made from the same steel. The only cutting tool in the entire tooling equipment not made of this steel is the tap. The bar is rotated at sixty-four revolutions per minute, giving a surface speed for the external cutting tools of approximately fifty-one surface feet per minute. Machining the British Forged Shell on Potter & Johnston Automatics. In making the British forged shell on
Fig. 13.
First Operation on Shrapnel Shell, performed on a No.
Potter
&
6A
Johnston Automatic Chucking and Turning
Machine
the Potter & Johnston automatic chucking and turning machine, three operations complete the work. The first operation completes the outside of the shell, except for the extreme end which is covered by the gripping mechanism of the chuck. The second operation finishes the inside of
the shell and at the same time finish-turns the extreme open end. After the second operation is performed the shell is "nosed," which consists in heating it in a lead
C
C
0>
<U
rC
i
C
ro
01
93
nose of the spindle of the machine. The shell is pushed onto this arbor until the end of the arbor strikes the bottom of the shell. The gripping mechanism which comprises six jaws B and a draw-in plunger C is contained inside the arbor. The external diameter of the arbor is machined to practically the same shape as the internal diameter of the The jaws are held in slots which conshell, but is smaller.
trol their
in every direction except radially. They are forced out radially by means of the draw-in bar C which
movement
provided with tapered seats that engage the inward end The bar C is operated by a hand lever D that extends up over the top of the machine, is f ulcrumed in a bracket on the rear bearing cap, and is connected to a sliding sleeve E. In clamping the work on the arbor, lever D is lifted up, this action drawing the sliding collar E to the right along the sleeve F, which, in turn, allows the forward end of the This releases the pressure of the fingers G to close in. outer end of the fingers on the draw-in bar C. When the pressure from bar C is released by means of handle D, then come into action forcing the heavy coil springs draw-in bar back and expanding the clamping jaws. Additional clamping means are provided by three set-screws which are brought to bear on the work after it has been clamped in position by the jaws. To release the work, the reverse action takes place, that is, lever D is forced down which slides the collar E to the left, operating the fingers G, which, in turn, overcome the pressure of the springs t allowing the clamping jaws B to collapse. First Machining Operation Set-up. The order of the first series of operations in machining a forged shrapnel shell is as follows: First, rough-turn 7 inches along body of
is
of the jaws.
shell,
face end and chamfer; second, finish-turn 21/2 inches along shell third, rough-groove for copper band and dovetail; fourth, turn waves in groove. For the first operation, the work is held on the expanding arbor shown in Fig. 14, and the tool equipment, which is of an unusually interesting character, is shown in Fig.
;
15.
The
first
rough-turning operation, accomplished by
94
turret tool A, which is of the relieving type to be described later, is held on the first face of the turret and roughs down
the body of the shell. On the opposite side of the holder is a roller support B which supports the shell while the turning tool is in operation. The end of the shell is faced by means of a facing tool C which is really a type of facing mill. The end of the shell is then chamfered by means of a chamfering tool that removes the sharp corner. After these operations have been performed, the turret is indexed and the second face of the turret is brought in
Machinery
Fig. 16.
Details of Relieving Turning Tool-holder
shown
in Fig. 15
with the chuck. This operation is accomplished with a relieving tool-holder E carrying a cutter e, which takes a cut 2% inches along the body of the shell. An interesting feature of this tool is that on the return stroke of the turret it swivels back out of the way so that the shell is not scored by the tool dragging over it. The construction
line
of this tool
is more clearly shown in Fig. 16. clearly shown in this illustration, the turret relieving turning tool comprises a shank on which is fulcrumed a tool-holding member B. This is slotted out to carry the
As
is
turning tool C which is clamped in place by two set-screws D and is adjusted to turn the correct diameter by means
95
of an adjusting stud and clamping nut F and G. The method of operating this tool is as follows The f ulcrumed tool-holder B is "held up" by means of a fillister-head screw, screwed into a stud H and acted upon by a coil spring /.
:
hole to receive the stud is drilled in the tool-holder B, allowing about 1/16 inch clearance. When the tool is in action it has a reverse position to that shown in the illustration, that is, the turning tool instead of being parallel with the center line is at a slight angle with it. In action, as soon as the turret advances, the tool comes into contact with the work, and the work, turning around, forces the cutting tool down and consequently depresses the spring, at the same time bringing the "lower part" of the hole into contact with the extended plug on the holder. In this the tool is held rigidly and in contact with the work. way As soon as the turret begins to move back, however, and the cutting pressure is released, the spring comes into action and throws up the tool, bringing it out of contact with the work. Upon the completion of the operation which is accomplished from the second turret face, the turret is again indexed and the next operation is performed from the rear cross-slide and the third turret face. The third operation consists in cutting the grooves for the rifling band, and, on account of the under-cutting necessary, involves some In order to hold the work rigidly while interesting points. the grooving tools are acting on it, a revolving support F is brought in from the turret. The wide tool G for cutting the band grooves (this tool removes the greatest amount of the stock) is held on the rear cross-slide and is of the under-cutting type; that is to say, it operates under the work or tangentially instead of radially. Held on a bracket on the third turret face are two tools and 7, the purpose of which is to dovetail the rifling band grooves. These turret tools are held in a holder working in a slide on the bracket fastened to the turret face and are operated by a block held on the rear cross-slide. The action of these three tools, therefore, is simultaneous. The wide grooving tool, however, is slightly ahead of the dovetailing tools.
1=
s
c 3 ^ O
c o o v
H6
97
The last operation is accomplished when the turret is indexed to the fourth position. Here, again, a roller support / steadies the work while the waving tool is in action on it.
The two waves that are formed are for the purpose of preventing the rifling ring from turning, and they deviate about 1/16 inch laterally from being a true annular rib. The tool for cutting these ribs is shown at K and is of
the forming type held in a dovetailed groove in the holder L. This also carries a roll which contacts with the waved surface of the face-cam N, the curve of which gives the correct out-and-in motions to the waving tool K. The cam face is on a sleeve that is threaded onto the nose of the spindle of the machine, as is shown to the left of the illustration opposite the first turret face.
Method of Holding Shell for Second Operation. The second series of operations on the shell is also performed on the Potter & Johnston automatic chucking and turning machine. The shell is held at the base end by a special collet of the draw-in type, as shown in Fig. 17. Fixed in the nose of the spindle is a positive stop A against which the shell is held by means of the draw-in collet B. This collet extends into the draw-in rod C, to which it is attached.
The method
of operating this gripping
mechanism
differs slightly from that shown in Fig. 14. In this case the spring collet is drawn into a tapered sleeve to clamp
on the work. This is effected by means of lever D which is fulcrumed in a bracket extending from the rear bearing cap of the machine and operates a sliding cam sleeve E. The cam, in turn, operates fingers F, only one of which is shown, the latter acting upon the draw-in rod C to which the collet is attached. By depressing lever D, the chuck is opened by means of the coil springs G which act upon the
it
the pressure of the fingers has been closes the chuck, and deLifting up handle it opens the chuck. pressing Second Series of Machining Operations on Shrapnel Shells. The operations on the shrapnel shell performed in the second setting are shown in Fig. 18. The relieving tool A, held on the first face of the turret, covers that section of the
released.
draw-in rod
C when
98
shell which in the former operation was held in the gripping jaws. While this cut is being taken, a turret tool B roughbores the powder pocket and diaphragm seat. The relieving tool A is constructed and operated similarly to the It will relieving tool described in connection with Fig. 16. be noted here that the threads on the spindle nose are pro-
TAPER TURNINO TOOL CARRIED ON FRONT CROSS-SLIDE AND OPERATED BY TURRET. REVERSE MOVEMENT OF TOOL OBTAINED BY USING RACK AND PINION.
Fig. 18.
Tooling Equipment used on No. 6A Potter & Johnston Automatic Chucking and Turning Machine for performing Second Series of Operations on Forged Shrapnel Shell
tected
by a cast-iron cap
to prevent
them from being
in-
jured. Upon the completion of the operation just described, the turret is indexed, bringing the second face in line with the spindle. Here the diaphragm seat is finished with a
flat
The
cutter C, which is held in the boring tool illustrated. turret is again indexed into the third position, where the powder pocket is finished by means of the flat cutter D.
The turret
99
is now indexed to bring the fourth face in with the spindle where the extreme open end of the shell is turned taper by means of a tool E that is carried on the front cross-slide and operated by the turret. By referring to this illustration, it will be noticed that the taper is turned from the spindle toward the outer end of the shell and is, therefore, a reverse turning operation. The tool is caused to move toward the turret by using a rack and pinion to reverse the movement. On this operation, as well as on the previous one, one man takes care of four machines.
line
Fig. 19.
Machining Inside of Shrapnel Shell, and threading with Automatic Collapsible Tap on Potter & Johnston Automatic Chucking and Turning Machine
Third Machining Operation on Shrapnel Shells. Before other machining operations are done on the shell, it any is taken to a lead bath where it is heated and afterward placed under a press which closes in the nose or open end of the shell. For machining in the third operation, the shell is held practically in the same manner as for the second operation, except that it is gripped farther along the body. The machining performed in this operation is as follows: On the first turret face, rough-bore and finishbore for a distance of 1 inch from the end of the shell; second turret face, rough-bore the inside of the shell for a distance of 1 inch back from the thread ; third turret face,
100
finish-form on the inside for a distance of 1 inch back of the thread; and fourth turret face, thread with a collapsiThe various machining operations on the 3-inch ble tap. size of shrapnel shells are performed on a standard Potter
&
is
Johnston 6A automatic chucking and turning lathe. It recommended that these machines be run in batteries or
2o
OPERATION
3o
OPERATION
Fig.
20.
First
Series of Operations on "Frankford" Shell on a Potter Johnston 6A Automatic Chucking and Turning Lathe
&
first
units of seven each, four machines being set up for the operation, two machines for the second operation, and
one machine for the third operation. The machining Machining "Frankford" Forged Shell. of the American or "Frankford" 3-inch type of high-explosive shrapnel shell is comparatively easy, inasmuch as there is no nosing to be done, and the entire shell may be machined
at
101
two settings. Fig. 20 shows the way in which the first operation is taken care of on the No. 6A Potter & Johnston automatic chucking and turning lathe. The forged shell is held on an expanding arbor of the same type as that shown In the first turret position, the operations conin Fig. 15.
4TM OPERATION
3RD
OPERATION
1ST
OPERATION
2ND
OPERATION
Fig.
21.
Second Series of Operations on "Frankford" Shell on Potter Johnston Automatic Chucking and Turning Lathe
&
taking a straight cut across the diameter and facing the end. The external turning tool A is of the relieving Both type, and B is a facing tool that works on the end. of these tools are supported and operated from the turret. roll support, not shown, steadies the work while tool A is
sist in
off
102
working. The turret now backs out, and a forming tool, held on the cross-slide, advances, cuts the rifling band and the semicircular grooves in the end of the shell, and at the
same time chamfers the

of the cross-slide, tom of the rifling
is
corner.
Knurl D, held on the rear

This knurls the bot-
then advanced.
band groove.
By referring to Fig. 20, it will be seen that the grooves do not extend entirely across the face of the knurl, but instead two "knurl" ribs similar to a double thread are formed on the periphery. This construction makes it pos-
Fig. 22.
Three-inch Shrapnel Shell made on a Gridley Automatic Turret Lathe
sible to sink the knurl into the work to the proper depth without exerting excessive pressure on the arbor and throw-
ing
it
out of
line.
Second
Series
of
Operations
on
"Frankford"
Forged
series of operations, the "Frankford" shrapnel shell is held in a draw-in collet as shown in Fig. 21. As the shell has been completely ma-
Shrapnel Shell.
For the second
chined on the outside,

erable distance.
it is let
into the collet for a consid-
For machining, it is shown gripped in the collet by jaws A and is backed up by positive stop B. At the first turret face, tool C rough-bores the diaphragm seat, tool D bores the thread diameter, and tool E faces and chamfers the end. The turret is now indexed, and tools F, G, and H perform similar finishing cuts. A holder
held on the third turret face carries tool / that chamfers the powder pocket, and at the fourth turret face a collapsible tap threads the open end.
Making Shrapnel
Lathe.
103
made on
ret lathe.
Shells on the Gridley Automatic Turret Figs. 22 to 25 show a three-inch shrapnel shell the 3 14 -inch Gridley single-spindle automatic tur-
tough.
The steel from which the shell is made is very The specifications are from 125,000 to 135,000
strength,
pounds
tensile
110,000
pounds
elastic
limit,
Fig. 23.
Tool set up for Producing the Shell shown
In
Fig. 22
a twenty-five per cent reduction of area, and a twelve per cent elongation. It will be seen from the above specifications that the steel is, of necessity, very tough and difficult to work; in addition, a large taper reamer must be used, and the outside of the shell must be relieved throughout the
central portion. It is also necessary to machine the piece to extremely accurate dimensions, all of which tends to
make the work
still
more
difficult.
Fig. 22
shows a view of
*e*
'
104
the shrapnel
It is approximately three inches in shell. diameter and eight inches long, and the limits allowed for the sizes are extremely close throughout, both inside and outside. Figs. 24 and 25 show the successive steps employed in machining the piece complete, the four views
START OF DRILL
Fig. 24.
Successive Steps and Operations employed

Shell
In
shown
Making the
in
Fig.
22
presented representing the appearance of the work and the operations performed at each indexing of the turret. Fig. 23 will enable the operation of the different parts to be more clearly understood.
105
While the operation of the Gridley automatic turret lathe generally understood by mechanics, it may be well to state briefly the general principles upon which work is done in the single-spindle machine. In this type of mais
chine, the position of the
work does not change
as
it
does
CUTTING OFF TOOL- THIS CAN BE GROUND AND RESET WITHOUT CHANGING ADJUSTMENT
13 M!N. 45 SEC.
START OF REAMER
KNURLING IS DONE ON HIGH BEFORE REAMER OR CUTT;NG OFF

.
TOOL COMMENCES TO WORK
22 MINI. 35 SEC. FINISH OF REAMER
22 MIN. 45 SEC.
START OF FINISH REAMER
REAMER
IS
TO CATCH
PIECE
WITHDRAWN PART WAY WHEN CUT OFF
28 MIN. 15 3EO. FINISH OF

26 MIN. 35 SEC.
REAMER STOCK FED AND DRILL READY TO START ON SECOND PIECE
AVERAGE TIMEI-27 MINUTES

Fig, 25.
Machinery
Successive Steps and Operations employed

Shell
in
shown
Making the
in Fig.
22
in the multiple-spindle machine, but the turning is accomplished by the operation of tools mounted on tool-slides
which, in turn, work on a turret that revolves about a horizontal axis, successively presenting the tools for operation upon the work. This will be readily understood by glanc-
106
ing at the illustration Fig. 23. It will also be noticed from this illustration that the forming tools and cutting-off tools are operated from a face-cam at the lower part of the ma-
The forming slide is actuated by a cam-groove cut one side of the cam-plate while the cutting-off slide receives its movement from a cam-groove on the reverse side
chine.
in
of this plate.
At the first position of the turret, a large 2 11/32-inch high-speed oil drill is run into the bar to a depth of 6 1/32 inches, and, at the same time, a knee-turner located on the tool-slide turns the outside of the stock, thereby removing
Fig. 26.
First Chucking on Warner & Swasey Turret Lathe for machining British Forged Shrapnel Shells
the scale from the bar. Referring to Fig. 23, which shows the turret in the third position, the end of this large drill is shown at A, and, of course, when at work, it would be The in the position of the reamer which is shown at F. time elapsed at the completion of this part of the work is eleven minutes, five seconds. At the second position of the turret, a smaller drill, 2 1/16 inches in diameter, which is shown at B, is run in at the bottom of the hole previously drilled to a depth of 29/32
inch.
At the same time a counterboring
tool,
which
is lo-
cated at
107
drill
C and which
at
is
attached to the
with a
set-
work counterboring the end of the hole in the shell. During the time that this drilling and counterboring operation is being performed, the forming tool shown
screw,
is
at
is
being fed into the outside of the head of the
shell,
finishing the three grooves as shown; in addition, a sizing tool E, which is at a fixed distance from the forming tool,
in and sizes the work to exactly the right length. The time elapsed up to the finishing of this part of the work
comes
is
thirteen minutes, thirty-five seconds.
2ND OPERATION FACE END, ROUND CORNER, AND FORM BAND GROOVE
UNDER-CUT BAND GROOVE
Machinery
Fig. 27.
Diagram
illustrating Position First Chucking on British
and Relation of Tools for Forged Shell
At the third position of the turret, which, by the way, is the one shown in Fig. 23, the large taper reamer F is run in, which operation removes the bulk of the stock for the taper, and a second step at the end of this reamer finishes the extreme end of the hole at the bottom of the shell. The blades of this reamer are nicked to break the chips as they are being formed. Before the reamer begins to cut, the is brought against the work (while it is on knurling tool
108
the high speed) by the cutting-off slide, which, of course, results in a better knurled section than would result if the knurling of the piece were done at a lower speed. During the reaming operation, the cutting-off tool G is run in part way to facilitate the final severing of the piece. In addition, the relieved part of the work is turned by a tool
tool is
mounted in a shown
This a templet / which operated by has a raised projection that throws the tool into the work after it has reached the right position with relation to the length of the shell. The total time elapsed up to the finat /
tool-holder on the slide of the turret.
and
it is
Fig. 28.
Set-up on Warner
& Swasey
Series of Operations on
Turret Lathe for Second Forged Shrapnel Shell
ishing of this part of the work is twenty-two minutes, thirtyAt the fourth and last position of the turret, five seconds. a finishing reamer sizes the outer end of the interior of the shell and is withdrawn but part way, so that, when the cutting-off slide comes in and finishes severing the piece, the
shell is
caught on the reamer and not allowed to drop and
possibly be injured by so doing. The average total time for making this piece complete is twenty-seven minutes. On account of the rigidity of the
tool
support, the tools do not require sharpening more often than once for fifty pieces, with the possible exception
109
of the cutting-off tool, which must be sharpened after about half that number of pieces have been completed.
Using Warner & Swasey Turret Lathe for Machining In Fig. 26 is shown a typical Forged Shrapnel Shells. on a Warner & Swasey No. 2A universal hollowset-up
hexagon turret lathe for machining an 18-pound shrapnel The arrangement of the various tools for performing the first series of operations is more clearly illustrated in Fig. 27, to which reference should now be made. The forging is located for machining on a special
shell forging.
SPECIAL GUIDE FOR STANDARD TAPER TURNING ATTACHMEN
2ND OPERATION
FINISH
Machinery
Fig. 29.
Diagram
illustrating
Sequence of Operations performed at Second Chucking
the spindle and carrying two spring-controlled centering bushings A. These serve to locate the shell, which is then gripped by the floating jaws of the chuck on the external diameter, and a stop on the end of the arbor locates the shell from the bottom of the powder
arbor
fitted into
pocket.
The first operation consists in taking a cut from the external diameter with a special box-turner provided with a
steadyrest and carrying two turning tools. The second operation is handled from the cross-slide, the shell forging meanwhile being supported by a roll steadyrest clamped to the turret. In this operation the closed end of the shell is
roll
110
faced with tool C, the corner rounded, and the band groove formed with forming tool D. The third operation first chucking is performed with tool F which produces the waves in the band groove, and is operated in the following manner: Referring to the lower left-hand corner of the illustration, it will be seen that a roll G is brought in contact with the face-cam B, thus giving the desired oscillating movement to the waving cutter. The fourth and final operation consists in under-cutting the band groove with a tool clamped to the turret. This tool gages from the end of the shell by a revolving stop H, and is provided with two slides,
Fig. 30.
Third Chucking Set-up on British Forged Shrapnel Shell
set at the desired angle to each other and the work, carrying under-cutting tools / and J. These slides are operated
by handle K.
Figs. 28
The second chucking on this shell is handled as shown and 29 on the same type of machine. As shown
is
in in
Fig. 29, the shell for this operation
gripped in an auto-
matic chuck, and a stop A for locating it is held in the The first operation consists in roughing out the spindle. powder pocket and diaphragm seat with a cutter B, and rough-turning that portion of the shell held in the chuck
111
in the previous chucking with a tool C. This tool is held in the cross-slide toolpost, and is controlled in its movement
by a special guide fastened

attachment.
The second pocket and diaphragm seat with a cutter D.
to the regular taper-turning operation finishes the powder
2ND OPERATION
BACK-FACE
3RD OPERATION THREAD
Machinery
Fig.
31.
Diagram
illustrating
Third Series of Operations
Relation of Tools for performing
ND OPERATION COUNTERBORE AND TURN
Machinery
Fig. 32.
First
Chucking on French Shell made from Bar Stock on Warner & Swasey Turret Lathe
After the second chucking, the shell is heated on the nose, is then brought back to the turret lathe, when the operations are performed as shown in Figs. 30 and 31.
closed in and
112
Here, again, the forging is held in the automatic chuck and is located by a plug A in the spindle. The first series of
operations consists in boring, facing and chamfering the nose with a counterbore B, and at the same time turning the external radius on the nose with a tool C. Tool C is held in the cross-slide square turret and is controlled in its movement by a special guide fitting on the regular taperturning attachment. The second operation, shown to the left of the illustration, consists in machining the radius inside the nose with
1ST OPERATION
TURN
2ND OPERATION FACE END, CHAMFER AND FORM
3RD OPERATION KNURL
ERATION
TAPER
TAPER-
ATTACHMENT
113
rough-drilled in a high-powered drilling machine to the bottom of the powder pocket. Assuming that this has been ac-
complished, the operations for the first chucking are then carried on as illustrated in Fig. 32. Here the shell is held in an automatic chuck and is located by a stop A. The first operation consists in counterboring the mouth with the counterbore B, and rough-turning the external diameter with tool C; second, counterboring with the cutter and turning further along the shell with a tool E; third, finishing the bottom with a cutter F and facing the end of the shell with a tool G.
3RD OPERATION ROUGH CHASE THREAD
1ST OPERATION RECESS
f~-
2ND OPERATI BORE, FACE, AND

TURN TAPER
114
knurl F from the cross-slide square turret. Fourth, taperturn from the end to the band groove with a tool G, guided by the taper-turning attachment. For the third chucking, the shell, as indicated in Fig. 34, is held in the same manner as for the first chucking. First, it is recessed with a tool A and brought into action by operating the special holder which has a cross-sliding movement second, it is bored and faced with a counterbore B from the turret, and taper-turned with a tool C operated by a special guide from the taper-turning attachment. In the third operation, the thread in the nose is rough-chased with a
;
--WT-
Machinery
Fig. 35.
and performing First Series of Operations on Forged Shells on "Lo-swing" Lathe

of holding
Diagram showing Method
tool
D, controlled in its movement by the chasing attachment of the machine; fourth, the thread is finished with a tap and tap-holder E. Machining Shrapnel Shell Forgings on the "Lo-swing"
lathe, the
a simple carriage to its "Lo-swing" Fitchburg Machine Works, Fitchburg, Mass., has adapted this machine for machining shrapnel shells of different types.. The following data and illustrations refer particularly to tooling used for machining the Russian and French shells. On the Russian shell, after centering, the
Lathe.
By adding
forging
36.
115
is held on a special arbor B shown in Figs. 35 Placed over this arbor is an expanding collar C, the inside surface of which is chamfered to fit against surface D on the stem of the arbor. The section of the arbor next to the spindle is threaded and a large nut and handwheel E are turned to pull the sliding sleeve C along the arbor and thus expand it to firmly grip the inside of the shell forging. Sleeve C is connected to the nut E by a threaded collar F. After the forging is securely located on the arbor, which it should be understood extends to the bottom of the powder pocket to gage it for length, the tail-
and
center
is
run in to support
it.
Fig. 36.
Set-up for performing First Series of Operations on Russian Forged Shell on "Lo-swing" Lathe
To those familiar with the "Lo-swing"

preciated that
its
lathe,
it
will be ap-
chief efficiency lies in its system of multi-
M are
ple turning tools.

all
Thus, on this job, tools H,

slide,
mounted on one
and
I, J, K, L, and in the illustration are
shown
in the positions they
occupy after taking their re-
At the beginning of the cut, turning tools K, drawn back clear of the work to allow sufWith the ficient clearance for tools H and I to operate. tools drawn back and the carriage at the extreme right of the bed, tool H is the first to come in contact with the work.
spective cuts. are L, and
This tool takes a roughing cut over the body of the forging, finishing at the radius on the nose.
116
Tool
controlled in its action by a former pin on the held in contact with the face of cam former tool-slide, by a stiff spring. Former slide O takes the place of the reguis
lar taper-turning former ordinarily used on the "Lo-swing" lathe. When the former pin in the slide carrying tool
reaches point P on former O, the tool is withdrawn to conform with the shape shown at on the forging. The tool is then fed in further toward the axis of the arbor, until the former pin reaches point Q on the slide, when the radius on the nose is completed. Tool is the only one mounted on a taper-turning block.
Machinery
Fig. 37.
Diagram showing Method of performing Second Series of Operations on Forged Shrapnel Shells on "Lo-swing" Lathe
Just after tool
H passes
point N, tool I commences to cut
at the end of the forging, taking a finishing cut and ending up in the position in which it is shown in the illustration.
After tool / reaches this position, the other tools are brought into action. Tools K, L, and uated on the carriage that no lateral feeding
J,
K, L, and
sit-
are so
required. When these tools are in action, the roller support R takes the thrust. Tool roughs out the band groove and is fed into the work by a handwheel. Tool L cuts the groove for
is
attaching the brass case to the shell, and tool M, carried on the same block, faces the end. Tools K, L, M, and S are Tool located on the same carriage and are fed in together.
117
S rounds the corner of the shell. The carriage on which tools K, L, M, and S are located is now drawn back out of the way, and the entire carriage moved over so that tool J
After rifling band groove. cutting off the center projection, the first series of operations on the shell is completed. Second Series of Operations on the Russian Shell. The second series of operations is performed on the inside
can be used to under-cut the
of the shell on the "Lo-swing" lathe, which is provided with a special turret for this purpose. As is shown in Figs. 37
and 38, the shell A is held in special collet jaws B that have a two-point bearing on the shell. Stop C in the spindle
Fig. 38.
Set-up on "Lo-swing" Lathe for performing Second Series of Operations on Russian Shell
To manipulate the chuck for on the work, handwheel D is turned, carrying tightening with it the nut E and ring F. Ring F carries pins sliding
locates the shell in the chuck.
it
in slots in sleeve
nut
is
H and driven into drawn back it also carries

collet
collet B, so that
collet
when
into the taper
in sleeve
H, closing the
on the work.
on the work.
first
Turning hand-
wheel
collet
operation is performed with tools /, /, K, and L. Tool / bores the powder pocket, tool / roughs the diaphragm seat, tool K rough-turns the thread diameter at the shell mouth, and tool L faces the The turret is now indexed, and boring-bar carrying end.
D B
in the opposite direction releases the grip of the
The
118
tool
brought into operation. This tool turns the curved To accomplish this, the turret locking-pin is removed, allowing the turret to float on its cenFastened on the ways of the lathe at the rear tral axis.
is
interior of the shell.
of the turret by a clamp O is the cam bracket carrying the guiding cam P. This cam, through pins Q and R in bracket S, controls the float of the turret and guides the In the illustration, the tool is shown at the cutting tool M.
Machinery
Fig. 39.
Diagram showing Method of machining French Shells on "Lo-swing" Lathe First Series of Operations
cut.
end of the
the
cam
is
It will also be noted that one surface of curved and the other is straight; therefore, to
compensate for this and also to steady the turret, pin R is backed up by a spring. Clamp O is now released and bracket moved back to allow the turret to be indexed. is located, when brought into the operating poBracket sition, by a stop on the bed of the lathe.
N N
.E
B,
& o &
J2? -s|
.
"E
o 05
l-
JSis
T,
r-
T3
^
,
<D
&5 "S
'o
o^S^^
C3
i
"^3
CO C3 QJ
JO
^
rti
JH p>
o.
<m
C^ 3 5*
8
o
ft
.8
119
120
great
stock,
many of the French shells are made from solid bar and when this is the case, the first operation, peris
formed as shown
the shell
is
made from
in Fig. 39, consists in rough-drilling. If a forging, this operation, of course,
dispensed with and the first tool used carries boring and facing cutters, as shown at A, B, C, and D. These roughbore the three diameters on the inside of the shell and face The next operation is accomplished off the end to length. with two finishing boring tools E and F, the depth of which is obtained by an adjustable collar G that comes against the
Fig. 41.
Series of Operations on Straight
Set-up on "Lo-swing" Lathe for performing Second Type of French Shell
produced with a collapsible tap H. The turret is then indexed two holes, bringing the special recessing tool into This tool is of the cross-slide type and carries a position. back recessing cutter /. This completes the first series of operations on the shell. The secSecond Series of Operations on Shell. French ond series of operations on a French shell is accomplished
as shown in Fig. 40. Here the shell is held in the same manner as described in connection with Fig. 35. The forg-
ing is placed on arbor B that has an expanding sleeve C operated by the hand-clamping wheel nut D. Eight cutting
1ST
2ND
CHUCKING OPERATION
1st
3RD
CHUCKING OPERATION
Fig. 42.
Set-up and Tool Equipment on the "Llbby" Turret Lathe

121
122
Tool A turns the diamethe central part, C cuts
tools are located on the carriage. ter at the open end of the shell,
the band groove, chamfers the section adjacent to the chamfers the end of the shell, and F knurls band groove, the band groove. Roll G, in connection with roll H, supports the shell while the knurling is being done, whereas tool / faces off the end of the shell. At the beginning of the cuts, tools C, D, E, and knurl F, also roll G and tool /,
are withdrawn. This permits tool A to cut the front end of the shell at the beginning and finish the diameter at the open end of the shell. Tool B next comes into action and turns the central part of the shell. Tool C is then located in the correct position for the band groove and the carriage on which tools C, D, and E are located is fed straight in, cutting the band groove -and chamfering. Knurl F is then brought into position to knurl the groove, with roll G backing up the work against roll H. The last operation is to cut off the center projection with tool /. Fig. 41 shows the tool set-up on the "Lo-swing" lathe for machining the straight type of French shell, in which two tool-blocks are used for doing the straight turning. The leading tool turns the end of the shell a little larger than the main body. The procedure for grooving, knurling, and facing the shell is that previously described for the forged On the French shrapnel shell, which is shown in Fig. 35. shell the second operation follows directly after the first, whereas on the Russian forged shell a nosing-in operation comes between the two machining operations. Using the "Libby" Turret Lathe for Machining Shrapnel One of the many ways of machining a shrapnel Shells. shell is illustrated in Figs. 42 and 43. This shows the set-up on the "Libby" turret lathe, manufactured by the InternaIn the first tional Machine Tool Co., Indianapolis, Ind, chucking, the forging, as shown at A, is held on a special solid arbor provided with a series of corrugations where it contacts with the forging. This, in addition to providing a rigid support, assists in gripping, and the shell is also gripped by a pair of chuck jaws that act as drivers. First, a gang tool-holder carrying three stellite turning tools o is
2ND 2ND
CHUCKING OPERATION
SRD
4TH
CHUCKING OPERATION
AlacJiincrji
Fig. 43.
Set-up and Tool Equipment on the "Libby" Turret Lathe
123
124
1ST
CHUCKING-2D OPERATION
brought into position, and the cutting
125
is started, continufor a distance of one-third of the length turned. To ing provide additional support, a roller back-rest, carrying a facing tool, is brought in to steady the work, and, as it is fed forward, the end of the forging is faced off and
chamfered. The second operation on the first chucking is shown at B. Here the cutter a is brought in first and starts the band
groove, after which the under-cutting tool b is brought in to under-cut the edges of the groove. In the meantime, roller c supports the work. Upon the completion of the groove, the holder carrying cutter d is advanced to finish-
face the end of the work and chamfer. The third operation cutting the waves in the band groove is of an interesting character and is accomplished as shown at C. cam e which is free to rotate with the
work
brought in contact with it then the cross-slide is advanced, carrying the waving tool / and the guide g. The guide g fits in the cam groove and controls the operais first
;
tion of the
waving
tool.
In the second chucking on the first operation the shell is reversed in the chuck and is held in the manner indicated at D, Fig. 43. The forging is located in the chuck by a stopcollar h, and is gripped on the external diameter by the jaws of the chuck. A stepped boring tool carrying five inserted blades is brought in to rough-bore the internal diameters and machine the shell to the proper thickness at the bottom of the powder pocket. This tool also carries a facing cutter that faces off the shell to the proper length. While the boring tool is working, a broad turning tool, held on the cross-slide, is brought in to bevel the nose preparatory to closing in. The next step is to taper-ream the internal diameter, as shown at E. This completes the operations for the second chucking. The nose of the shell is now heated and closed in, after which the third series of operations is performed. The first step in the third chucking is to bore for the thread and face the end of the shell with a turret tool, as shown The next operation is to machine the curved conat F.
126
3b
3D
J
Machinery
CHUCKING-FORMING END
Fig. 45.
Machining Shrapnel Shell Forgings on a 22-inch Extra-heavy Turret Lathe
127
tour of the nose of the shell with a special turret tool as shown at G. Here a wide forming cutter i, held in a turret tool-holder, is brought in contact with the work, finishing the nose of the shell to the proper form. During this operation, the shell is supported by a roller in the holder. The next operation is to form the inside of the nose of the shell to the proper shape, as shown at H. This is accomplished with a forming blade /, held in a holder clamped in the toolpost. Following this, a collapsible tap is brought in from the turret to thread the nose of the shell, as shown
at
/.
Machinery
hig. 46.
Method
of holding
Shrapnel Shells for First Operation on a 22-inch Turret Lathe
Machining Shrapnel Shells on a Heavy 22-inch Turret Still another method of machining shrapnel shells The in a heavy turret lathe is shown in Figs. 44 and 45. shell being machined is an 18-pound British shrapnel shell made from a forging. It is held on an expanding arbor for the first operation, as shown in Fig. 46. The arbor is of the three-point support type and is positive in its grip.
Lathe.
of the nose-piece are located three capable of being rotated by a square-ended wrench. These mesh with teeth in bevel gear B which, in turn, is threaded onto arbor C. The forward end of this arbor is cone-shaped and operates the three gripping fingers in the open end of the shell, whereas another rod passing through arbor C and connected to plunger D operates, through the coil spring, the three fingers used in gripping
Around the periphery
pinions
128
the shell by the powder pocket. This arbor holds the shell securely while the machining operations are being accomplished.
The first operation performed at the first chucking of the work is shown at C in Fig. 44. Here a turning tool-holder clamped to the turret and carrying two cutters is advanced and takes a roughing cut from the exterior diameter of the shell for practically its entire length. The shell is supported by three roller supports as illustrated. The second operation at the first chucking is performed from the cross-slide, as shown at D. Here a forming tool of the tangent type roughs out the rifling band groove, leaving
Machinery
Fig. 47.
Cutting Square Thread in Nose of French Shrapnel Shell in "Automatic" Threading Lathe
metal in the center for the production of the wave The third operation is facing off the closed end of the ribs. shell from the turret as shown at E, and the fourth operation consists in machining the waved ribs as shown at F. The tool for accomplishing this operation is held on the cross-slide and is operated from a face-cam on the nose of
sufficient
the spindle. In the second chucking the shell is held in a three-jaw scroll chuck. The first operation is to rough-bore the inside of the shell and powder pocket with a tool G, Fig. 45, held in the turret directly after this a finishing tool of the
;
same shape
is
129
brought in, finishing the surfaces previously roughed out. The second operation is to face off the open end of the shell and taper-form back of the nose from the cross-slide, as shown at H, and at the same time turn that portion of the exterior surface of the shell not machined in the previous operation with a tool clamped to the turret
as
shown
at
/.
Previous to the third chucking, the nose of the shell is heated and closed in. The shell is then held in a three-jaw
Machinery
Fig. 48.
Threading Base End of Bar-stock Shrapnel Shells "Automatic" Threading Lathe
in
chuck provided with special jaws. The first operation, as shown at /, consists in boring and turning the nose of the shell with a tool held in the turret. Following this, the hole is reamed with a standard reamer and tapped with a collapsible tap. Both of these tools are held in the turret,
scroll
but are not shown in the illustration. This completes the machining operations on the shell. Threading Shrapnel Shells on "Automatic" Threading Considerable difficulty has been experienced in Lathes. cutting the square thread in the nose of the French shrapnel
130
shell.
One method which accomplishes this operation satisfactorily is shown in Fig. 47, and is accomplished on a
12-inch "Automatic" threading lathe built by the Automatic Machine Co., Bridgeport, Conn., and equipped with special
tools for this purpose. Referring to this illustration, it will be seen that two tools are used a roughing tool A,
A roughs out the thread to a type of thread, whereas tool B squares it up. The roughing and finishing tools are held on the forward and rear carriages, respectively, and are
and a finishing
tool B.
Tool
shape similar to the
Acme
Fig. 49.
Turning, facing, and threading Plugs for Closed End of Barstock Shrapnel Shells in "Automatic" Threading Lathe
operated simultaneously, being advanced throughout the length of the thread, withdrawn and returned to start a new cut. The method of operating the tools is one of the chief features of the "Automatic" threading lathe. The base end of shrapnel shells when made from bar stock is as a rule bored out and a plug inserted to eliminate any piping effect in the bar. Fig. 48 shows the method of accomplishing this operation on a 12-inch "Automatic" threading lathe. The work is held in a three-jaw universal chuck and is supported by a roll steadyrest comprising two
rolls
131
that are located beneath the work. On the extended end of the rear roller stud is fastened a swinging stop that is used for locating the base of the shell in the correct
The base of the shell is counposition ready for threading. terbored in another machine, previous to the threading operation. The threading is done with a circular tool held on a special internal threading tool-holder, the latter being retained in the toolpost carriage. The threading tool-holder can be moved longitudinally to bring it into the proper relation to the work. It is also held so that the cutting edge is turned upside down as this action forces the work
Fig. 50.
Grinding Shrapnel Shells on a Norton Special-purpose Grinding
Machine
the
is
down in work
contact with the roller supports. By handling manner, a steadyrest of the ordinary type with and the operation of the attachment dispensed
in this
facilitated.
shells
One method of making plugs for the base end of shrapnel when made from bar stock is shown in Fig. 49. For
work, a 12 by 4 "Automatic" threading lathe equipped with special tools designed for this purpose is used. The machine is provided with a draw-in collet chuck that holds the rough forged blank. The order of handling the operathis
132
tions on this machine is to use the rear tool A for turning the external diameter of the plug. This is handled at the same rate of feed as that required for threading, so that it is sometimes necessary to take more than one cut, depending on the amount of material left on the diameter. The vertical slide B is for facing only and carries a cutting tool C. This is supposed to finish the face in one cut, but as the work will spring considerably, a light finishing cut is taken when the tool is being drawn back from the center to the circumference of the work. The threading tool is held on the front toolpost and is of single-point construction. The feed given to this tool is automatically controlled, both as to pitch and depth of cut at each traverse. In actual operation, both the threading and turning tools are in motion all the time on the work, but the tools are in-
0>
133
produced. They also point out the fact that portions of the shell are so hard that it is extremely difficult, if not impossible, to turn it in the allowable time. The varied heat-treatment given to the shell on the closed end and nose leaves it harder in some sections than others, as indicated in Fig. 51. The section E, 2y% inches from the closed end of the shell, must strike from 42 to 50 on the scleroscope, and the section A at the nose must strike between 20 and 25. The section marked Z), or that part of it to the left of the line that marks the limit of the heattreating on the closed end, has not been heat-treated at all,
k~#~-H
DRIVING PIN'
!=[$
DRIVING PIN
_f
HEADSTOCK CENTER
134
ness that the grinding machine becomes a necessity. In the face of these varying degrees of hardness of the shrapnel shell, it will be seen that it is difficult to secure wheels of the right grain and grade to suit all of these conditions.
With this information in mind, we can more intelligently take up the actual grinding of the shell. The Norton Grinding Co., Worcester, Mass., has been actively engaged in developing methods of grinding shrapnel shells and the following illustrations and descriptions apply to this work.
HEADSTOCK STOCK CENTER
jTl__
<
2V 4
DRIVING Pl?f
;..J_J~"
HEADSTOCK CENTER
'"T
135
Some manufacturers use a three-operation method of grinding the shrapnel shell as illustrated in Fig. 53. In this case, the sections A and D are first ground with the same wheel, as American manufacturers deem it advisable to grind surface A rather than to finish it by turning. The second stage in this grinding is the finishing of the nose E with a formed wheel, and the third stage is the finish-grinding of the body at points B and C.
Two-operation Method of Grinding Shrapnel Shells. The procedure followed in grinding shrapnel shells by the two-operation method is first to screw plugs into the open
Fig. 54.
Wheel
Radius Wheel-truing Device for forming Grinding for grinding Shrapnel Shell Nose
end of the shells, as shown in Fig. 52. The outer ends of these plugs are centered, and the projection left on the closed end of the shell with the center intact acts as a means of supporting the shell. Some of the Canadian manufacturers vary this practice by cutting off the center projection on the closed end of the shell and fitting a cap with a center hole over the closed end. Others use a ball-bearing
cup center to carry the closed end.
American manufac-
turers, however, leave the center projection on the shell until after the grinding has been finished.
In grinding the nose end of the
shell,
the amount of metal
removed varies from 0.020
to 0.090 inch on the diameter.
136
at
from 6000 to 6250 surface work is 75 revolutions per minute, or a surface speed of practically 75 feet, and the machine used is a Norton 6 by 32 plain grinder. The wheel used is generally 14 inches in diameter by 214-inch The wheel requires truing for every five to twenty face. shells, depending upon the amount of metal removed and the hardness of the shell. For truing, a simple radius fixture carrying a diamond is used. Fig. 54 shows this wheeltruing device clamped on the grinding machine bed. It is applied in the same manner as the usual steadyrests used
feet per minute.
The grinding wheel operates The speed
of the
Fig. 55.
Norton Special Form Wheel-truing Device for truing Wheel for grinding Shrapnel Shell Body
for supporting the work. The diamond is mounted in a swinging arm that is operated by a hand lever as shown.
By
successive cuts across the wheel, the desired shape
is
attained.
For grinding the body either a 10 by 24 special-purpose or 10 by 36 Norton grinding machine is employed. The amount of metal removed from the body varies from 0.030 to 0.075 inch on the diameter, and the limits vary from 0.002 to 0.010 inch, depending largely on the requirements of the plant in which the work is being done. The wheel used on the body is 20 inches in diameter and is of the ring-wheel
137
Fig. 56.
Besly No. 14 Ring Wheel Grinder equipped for grinding Shrapnel, but shown without Hoods and Water Attachments
It will be noticed in Fig. 52 that the wheel for grinding the body is also formed to shape. The method of truing the wheel for shaping the shrapnel shell body is shown in
type.
Machinery
Fig. 57.
Fixture used on Besly No. 14 Ring Wheel Grinder for grinding Center End from Shrapnel Forgings
Fig. 55. This attachment is clamped to the front of the grinding machine bed and at the top of the bracket is fitted a slide A operated by handwheel B. Upon the face of this
138
slide nearest the
grinding wheel is pivoted an angular arm the diamond D at its lower end. Under the supports end of the upper arm is a spiral spring that keeps the diamond normally back from the wheel. A plate former E clamped to the bottom face of the bracket is shaped to agree with the form to be given the wheel. At the lower extremity of the arm and behind the diamond is mounted a When the roll F that bears constantly against form E. is reciprocated by turning the handwheel, the diamond slide diamond is made to traverse a path conforming with the cam that guides it. By moving the wheel in toward the diamond and making successive traversings of the diamond,
C that
the wheel
is
given the desired shape.
Fig.
58.
Tools for making
Base of Powder Cup
For grinding the body, the wheel must be trued after every ten to twenty-five shells are ground, depending upon the amount of metal removed and the hardness of the shell. In grinding shrapnel shells, the usual method is to fit a lot of the shells with the driving plugs and carry them all through to completion before removing the plugs. For Removing Center End From Shrapnel Forgings. all the machining operations on the performing practically shell, a center projection is left on the closed end of the shell for supporting it. This, of course, must be removed before the shell is completed. One method of doing this is to use a Besly No. 14 ring-wheel grinder equipped with a
special fixture. shown in Fig. 56,
139
Besly grinder fitted up for this work is and the fixture used for holding the shell is shown in Fig. 57. The machine, as furnished, is arranged for wet grinding, but is not so fitted up in the illustration. The fixture is fastened to the geared lever feed table and is
of simple design. It is provided with a backing-up stop A, the work resting in two semi-spherical groove projections on the fixture. The operator simply holds the shrapnel shell in place by hand and then feeds it in against the wheel and traverses it past in the usual manner. The time for removinch from the ing a %-inch diameter stub end projecting of the shell is less than a minute. body In the British Press Tools for Making Powder Cup. the powder in the base of the shell used for shrapnel shell,
Fig. 59.
Tools for making Top
Member
of
Powder Cup
exploding
it
and ejecting the lead
bullets, etc., is held in
tin-plate powder cup. This is completed in the punch press in the manner shown in Figs. 58 and 59, and comprises two
and a top. The base is made from tin plate 0.022 inch thick, whereas the top is made from 0.036 inch thick tin plate. The bottom of the cup is completed in one
parts, a base
operation with the punch and die shown in Fig. 58, which is held in a single-action press. It is turned out from a blank 3 7/32 inches in diameter and is cut out and formed in one
size is 2*4 inches diameter by After cupping, the top edge is trimmed in a turret lathe. The press operations on the top, as shown in Fig. 59, are a little more complex. The first operation con-
operation. inch high.
The completed
.+_>
<x>
.9
s.s
010
03
$H
Ctf
+ 03
<l) r-i
O C
'-
ll
DQ
0>
P* 43
(>
O Ml M
fl5
1.1" A
QQ
140
ferent governments varies.
141
There are 252 in the Ameriand 235 or 236 in the British 15-pound shell. The bullets used by the U. S. government have six flattened sides, to facilitate packing, whereas those used by foreign governments are spherical. There are several methods of making shrapnel bullets. One is to cast the bullets in iron molds, which are split in the center, so that the bullet can be removed when cast. Another is to cut off slugs from lead wire and strike these between dies in a heading machine. The bullet heading machine takes the wire from a reel, cuts it oif forms it and
can 15-pound
shell,
,
the resultant flash automatically. In making the American bullets, a second operation follows, consisting in The Waterbury Farrel Foundry & flattening the sides. Machine Co. furnishes unit equipments for doing this work. For the flattened bullets, the unit consists of one hydraulic wire extruding press and fourteen heading machines capable of giving a production of 850. bullets per minute. For the spherical bullet, the unit equipment consists of one
off
trims
hydraulic extruding press and eight heading machines, giving a production of 950 bullets per minute. The method of casting lead bullets in ordinary molds is antiquated, and another method somewhat similar to that just described has taken its place. The first step is to produce the wire from which the bullets are eventually made. This is accomplished in two ways. The first is the hot metal process and consists in pouring the molten lead into a cylinder, from which it is extruded through a die by a plunger advanced into the cylinder. By this method, it is necessary to allow the metal to settle before the press can operate. An improvement over this is utilized in presses built by a hydraulic lead press manufacturer of Brooklyn, and consists in first casting ingots of the required diameter and length and then charging the press with these instead of pouring the molten lead into the press chamber. Two One has a presses have been designed for this process. capacity of 700 tons and is charged with ingots weighing 150 pounds, whereas the other has a 900-ton capacity and is charged with 200-pound ingots. The product from these
142
two machines is 1800 pounds of lead wire from the small and 2500 pounds from the large press per hour. The wire as it is extruded from the die is wound on a reel carrying 2000 pounds of wire. There are two principal types of swaging machines used for making these lead bullets from wire. One carries a single set of dies, whereas the other carries twelve sets of tools. The operation of the latter will be described. Referring to the diagram, Fig. 60, twelve reels of lead wirenot shown are arranged in tandem on stands behind the The wire is conveyed from these press, six reels in a row. reels to the dies by a feeding mechanism, being guided to the individual tools by a plate A, having twelve U-shaped impressions in its top edge. The wire now passes over a spring B which serves to lift it up slightly at each stroke of the press. The tools C and D, as shown, are provided with half -spherical depressions in their adjacent faces and are set so that they come within 1/64 inch of meeting. The dies are guided and controlled in action by a special mechanism, and the press in which they are carried operates at 70
revolutions per minute.
840 bullets per minute.
As
This gives a rated production of is clearly indicated in the illus-
tration, considerable scrap is formed in making lead bullets by this process in fact the scrap is about 33 per cent of the reel of wire; also owing to the setting of the punches
a slight fin is formed around the periphery of the bullet. After forming, the bullets are taken to a tumbling machine where they are tumbled for one hour. No other material is put into the tumbling barrel, but the action of the bullets working on themselves satisfactorily removes all the Both the swaging and tumbling operations must be fins. carefully watched because of the necessity of having the bullets a certain weight. The allowable variation on one pound of bullets is one dram, and there are forty-one bullets to the pound. Ten pounds of lead rod make 6*/2 pounds of bullets, and the scrap resulting from the swaging operation is remelted and used over again. After tumbling, the bullets are inspected and are then ready for use.
CHAPTER V
MAKING FUSE PARTS
COMBINATION
a large
number
of small parts
timing and percussion fuses comprise made from different metals
in various ways. Some of the brass rod or alloys of copper and aluminum, whereas others are made from hot-pressed f orgings and are machined after being formed to shape. In the following, a brief description of several different methods of making the most important fuse parts will be
and
alloys,
and are produced
parts are
made from
Fig.
1.
Tools used
in
forging Brass Fuse Socket
illustrated and described, together with details regarding the forging tools used for the socket and plug. The fuse socket, which Forging the Fuse Socket. screws into the nose of the shrapnel shell and acts as a base for the fuse, is made from a special forgeable alloy casting containing 40 per cent copper, 58 per cent zinc, and 2 per cent lead. The first step in this process is to melt the above constituents in the usual manner and then to cast
the slugs in sand molds, six to eight being gated together. These castings are made 2 11/16 inches in diameter by 11/16 inch thick, as shown in Figs. 1 and 2. There are several methods in use for forging the plugs, but the genIn this particular case, a No. 23 eral principle is the same.
143
144
MAKING FUSE PARTS
Bliss press capable of exerting a pressure of 250 tons i& used. The castings are placed in the furnace where they
are allowed to "soak" at a temperature varying from 1200

to 1300 degrees F., or, in other words, until they reach a dull red color. One casting at a time is then quickly re-
moved and placed in the impression of the die shown tothe right in Fig. 1 and in detail in Fig. 2. The working
Machinery
Fig.
2.
Diagram showing Construction

forging
of Tools used in
Fuse Socket
tool steel
parts of these dies are made from Jessop's high-carbon and one blow of the press completes the forging, turning out about 3000 in ten hours. The tools used for this purpose are of interesting construction, as shown in Fig. 2. They comprise a lower die A machined out to the shape of the finished forging and carrying an ejector, and
MAKING FUSE PARTS

lower former
ing
145
B operated by plunger C which ejects the forg-
the die. The top member or punch comThis is screwed. a holder D into which the punch prises is bored out to fit an ejector F which ejects the forging as and stripper or the ram of the press ascends. Punch G ejector F are made from high-speed steel, hardened. the completed forging. shows the cast blank and The brass plug shown in Fig. 3 Forging Brass Plugs. is used as a temporary cap for the shrapnel to protect it during transportation. It remains in the fuse socket until the shrapnel shell reaches the field of operations, when it This member is removed and replaced by the timing fuse. is made from a special forgeable alloy casting 2 inches in
if it sticks in
Fig.
3.
Tools used for forging

is
Brass Plug
diameter by
similar
inch thick and
cast in sand molds in a
manner to the fuse socket. It is also composed of the same constituents as the socket and is forged in the same type of press. The construction of the tools, however, varies somewhat from that of the tools used in making the socket, as will be seen upon reference to Figs. 3 and 4. The tools for the plug comprise a lower die A
carrying a combined ejector and forming die B. Inserted in this lower forming die is a secondary ejector C which is operated by plunger D. The upper member of this forging tool consists of a punch-holder E carrying forming punch F which is counterbored to receive an ejector ring G. Passing down through the center of punch F is a center-punch
146
that
is
MAKING FUSE PARTS

made
in
two
parts.
The lower member
is
made
of
high-speed steel, hardened, whereas the upper portion is ordinary carbon steel. This center-punch is operated to eject the forging by a plunger / on the up-stroke of the press through the action of three pins J coming in contact shows the rough casting with the flange on punch H. and L the completed forging.
Machinery
Fig.
4.
Diagram showing Construction

forging Brass Plug
of Tools for
The New Britain Tooling Machining Brass Socket. automatic chucking machine, referred to in the following, consists essentially of a multiple-chuck turret with capacity for holding five or six pieces of work, acted upon simultaneously by four or five tool-holding spindles. The sequence of operations is similar to that of a multiple-spindle screw
for
MAKING FUSE PARTS

machine.
147
removed and a rough blank inserted at each indexing. The machine is not idle while chucking, there being one more chuck than spindles.
finished piece
is
ADVANCE 0.022 PER REV. OF SPINDLES PRODUCTION 120 PIECES PER HOUR
5.
Machinery
Fig. Diagram showing First Series of Operations on Fuse Socket on the New Britain Automatic Chucking Machine
The shrapnel socket which, as previously explained, made from a brass casting and pressed into rough shape,
machined in two settings
in the
is
is
New
Britain No. 24 chuck-
148
MAKING FUSE PARTS
first
ing machine. This machine has four spindles, and at the spindle position, as shown in Fig. 5, reamer A cleans out the hole in the pressed brass blank, counterbore B cleans out the inside, and tool C faces the end. At the
ADVANCE 0.022 PER REV. OF SPINDLES PRODUCTION 120 PIECES PER HOUR
Machinery
Fig.
6.
Diagram
Socket on
New
illustrating
Second Series of Operations on Fuse Britain Automatic Chucking Machine
MAKING FUSE PARTS
149
ADVANCE 0.025 'PER REV. OF SPINDLE PRODUCTION 50 PIECES PER HOUR
Machinery
Fig.
7.
First Series of Operations on
Seven-spindle
New
Britain
Fuse Body on No. 73 Automatic Chucking Machine
second spindle position, reamer D finishes the central hole, counterbore E faces the bottom, and tool F chamfers the
hole.
150
MAKING. FUSE PARTS
The under-cutting preparatory to threading is done at the third spindle position. The operation is performed with tool G working on the cross-cutting head H. When the
pressed blank is fed in and reaches stop /, it commences to of the cross-cutting head backward. push the housing A pair of stationary fingers J operate in oblique slots in the housing H, and as the housing presses down on these fingers, the motion gives a cross movement to the undercutting tool G and its arbor K. In this manner, the undercutting of the piece is performed. The fourth spindle operation is simply that of tapping the threaded interior with a tap L. Second Operation on Shrapnel Socket. Fig. 6 shows the order of operations performed on the shrapnel socket at the second chucking, the work being screwed on threaded At the first spindle position, pilot A engages the arbors. central hole, while tool B turns the external diameter, tool C chamfers the corner, tool D turns the thread diameter, tool E faces the shoulder, and counterbore F finish-forms the nose of the piece. At the second position, these same surfaces are machined with finishing tools of the same design as those just described. At the third spindle position, the shoulder at the end of the threaded section is under-cut. This is done by a crosscutting head, similar to that shown in Fig. 5 and carrying the cutter G. At the fourth spindle position, the final oper-
threading is performed with die H. In Fig. 7 is illustrated an inMachining Fuse Bodies. This teresting tooling set-up for machining a fuse body. is done on the No. 73 seven-spindle New Britain automatic chucking machine. The operations in this set-up are performed on one end only of the fuse body. Strictly speaking, this is a seven-spindle machine, but the first four spination
dles carry internal spindles running at high speed that cooperate with the external spindles in machining the work, making this virtually an eleven-spindle machine. At the first spindle position, the broad face and stem are machined with cutters A of hollow-mill type, and centering tool B, carried in the inner spindle, centers the work for drilling.
MAKING FUSE PARTS
151
In the second spindle position, tools C bevel the external diameter of the flange at the same time that drill D is producing the hole in the stem. In the third spindle position, roll D supports the work against the thrust of beveling tool E, and the small drill F held in the internal spindle deepens the hole. At the fourth spindle position, the external spindle carries a hollow-mill G that finishes the stem diameter, is carried in the internal spindle to and a counterbore
machine the central
hole.
Fig.
8.
Machining a Shrapnel Head on the New Britain No. 24 Automatic Chucking Machine
A cross-cutting head in the fifth spindle position carries a circular tool / that machines on both sides of the section subsequently to be threaded, and while this operation is being performed the pilot J steadies the work as well as the In the sixth spindle position, the small hole is tool-holder. threaded with tap K, and the exterior is threaded with a In the seventh die, tap and die being of different pitches. for spindle position, a holder carries the forming tool
152
MAKING FUSE PARTS
cutting grooves in the face of the flange, and the same spinthat finishes the hole in the stem. dle carries a reamer Steel Shrapnel Heads. Heads for shrapnel Machining
shells
made from cold-drawn
steel
stampings are machined
ADVANCE 0.0125 PER REV. OF SPINDLE PRODUCTION 62 PIECES PER HOUR
Machinery
Fig.
9.
First Series of Operations on Shrapnel Head on the New Britain Automatic Chucking Machine
in
two settings on a No. 24 New Britain automatic chucking machine of the four-spindle type, shown in Fig. 8. This piece, shown in Fig. 9 in its sequence of operations, is especially difficult to machine on account of the stringy nature of the metal. The work is held for the first chucking with
MAKING FUSE PARTS
153
ADVANCE 0.0125 PER REV. OF SPINDLE PRODUCTION 90 PIECES PER HOUR
Machinery
Fig. 10.
Second Series
New
of Operations on
Britain
Automatic Chucking Machine
Shrapnel Head on the
the small end out, and in the first spindle position the facing on the end is distributed between tools A and B, while counterbore C roughs out and chamfers the hole. In the second spindle position, tool faces the end, and counterfinishes the hole. bore cross-cutting head of a type similar to that previously described is carried in the third
D A
154
spindle position.
MAKING FUSE PARTS
This retains a tool F which produces an annular groove in the nose of the head, the work being supported with pilot G. The fourth and last operation consists in threading the hole with the tap H.
ADVANCE 0.0167 PER REV. OP SPINDLE PRODUCTION 225 PIECES PER HOUR
Machinery
Fig. 11.
Diagram showing Tooling Set-up for machining Fuse Nose on New Britain Automatic Chucking Machine
MAKING FU$E PARTS
155
ORMING TOOL
1ST
OPERATION
SELF-OPENING DIE
NTERNAL
NECKING TOOL,
2o
OPERATION
2o
OPERATION
3D
OPERATION
3D
OPERATION
FIRST SERIES OF OPERATIONS

Fig.
SECOND SERIES OF OPERATIONS
12. Machining Brass Fuse Socket on 3^/4 -inch "Gridley" Automatic Turret Lathe First and Second Series of Operations
Second Series
set-up
of Operations on Shrapnel Heads.
The
held
for
the
series
is
of
operations
performed at the
second chucking
shown
in Fig. 10, the
work being
156
MAKING FUSE PARTS
on threaded arbors. In the first spindle position, tools A and B face the shoulder, and counjerbore C machines a In the second spindle position, seat in the inner flange. counterbore D finishes the part roughed out by C in the previous operation, tool E faces the end, and tool F chamfers the inner edge.
In the third position, a cross-cutting external cutting tool G is utilized for attachment carrying recessing the external diameter next to the shoulder. The threading on the external diameter is accomplished with in the fourth spindle position. the die The time fuse nose Machining Shrapnel Fuse Noses. for a shrapnel shell, which is made from a brass forging, is machined as shown in Fig. 11 on a No 33 New Britain
automatic chucking machine at one setting. It this case, an extra spindle designated as No. is added to the machine for equalizing or properly locating the forging in the chuck when it is being tightened. At the first spindle position, tool A takes a cut from the external diameter, tool B cuts an annular recess in the face, and counterbore C roughs out the center portion. In the second spindle position, the same operations are performed with finishing tools. In the third spindle position, a cross-cutting head carries a recessing The tool D that forms a recess back of the tapped portion. hole is then tapped in the fourth spindle position, and in the fifth spindle position a special counterbore F takes a light finishing cut from all the surfaces previously machined. The external surfaces of the fuse nose are, machined on a
turret lathe.
Machining Shrapnel Fuse Parts on "Gridley" Automatics. The machining of fuse parts for the British shrapnel shell on "Gridley" single- and multiple-spindle automatics, made by the Windsor Machine Co., Windsor, Vt., forms the
numbasis of several interesting tooling equipments. ber of the parts are machined from hot-pressed brass forgThe fuse ings, so that they must be handled separately.
socket, as has been previously described, is made from a brass forging and is machined complete in two operations
on a
3% -inch "Gridley" automatic turret lathe of the singleThe manner

in
spindle type.
which the work
is
loaded in
MAKING FUSE PARTS
157
ORMING TOOL
SECOND SERIES OF OPERATIONS

FIRST SERIES OF OPERATIONS
Fig. 13.
Machinery
and Second Series of Operations Diagram on Fuse Body on "Gridley" Automatic

illustrating First
158
MAKING FUSE PARTS
the chuck and held for the first series of operations is shown at A in Fig. 12. The rough blank a is first placed over the spring fingers b, which are held in a holder clamped in the turret, but are free to rotate. When the work is into the chuck, it forces back spring-ejecting stud pushed c, which, as soon as the pressure of the chuck is released,
ejects the work.
As the loading
turret, the
first
device operates on the first slide of the machining operation takes place on the
is
second
slide.
This
a comparatively simple operation and
consists in boring the central recess with a tool d and chamfering with tool e. The turret is then indexed, bringing the
internal necking tool / into position. This is held in a holder and is operated by the forward motion of the forming
slide. Following this, tap g is brought into position to thread the recess in the socket. The operation of the turret is now stopped automatically until the operator loads a new piece in the chuck. The tapping is done with the spinAfter dle running in the forward direction on slow speed. the hole has been tapped, the spindle is reversed and operated at a higher speed. The spindle continues to run backward for loading, and is still running backward, but slowed down, at the time of the second operation. It is for this reason that the boring tool d operates on the reverse side At the of the hole, and tool e is mounted upside down. third operation, the spindle is still running backward but is speeded to its highest speed while the internal necking is done with the tool on the reverse side of the hole. The method of holdSecond Operation on Fuse Socket. ing the fuse socket for performing the second operation on the 3 14 -inch "Gridley" single-spindle automatic turret lathe The socket h, which has now is shown at B in Fig. 12. been threaded, is screwed onto the body of special arbor i, On fitting in sleeve j that is gripped by the spring collet. the reduced end of arbor i is a nut which serves to clamp the work up against the face of sleeve j. The method of using this arbor is as follows: To chuck the work, sleeve j and its auxiliary members are removed from the spring collet, and the work is screwed
160
position
MAKING FUSE PARTS
and back to slow just before the fourth position. The fuse body is made Machining the Fuse Body. from a hot-pressed brass blank, and is machined in two chuckings in "Gridley" multiple-spindle automatics. The first series of operations is performed in a "Gridley" 1%-inch multiple-spindle automatic in the order shown to the left in Fig. 13. The work is loaded in the chuck by hand. Forming tool A now advances and rough-forms the outer diameter, whereas flat drill B and trepanning tool C combine to drill the central hole and trepan the narrow channel. At the second spindle position, tool D finishforms and necks the outer surface, while tool E counterbores the surfaces of the recess. Die F at the third spindle
threads the body, and at the fourth spindle position forming tool G turns down the outer end of the finishes the counthread while a floating trepanning tool terbored and trepanned surfaces. It should be mentioned here that the hot-pressing of this brass part makes it extremely difficult to machine, so that the edges of the tools
position
now
dull rapidly.
Second Series
of Operations on Fuse Body.
The method
of holding the fuse body while the second series of operaThe worktions is being performed is shown in Fig. 14. of the machine are fitted with special nose-pieces spindles
B, the inner surface of which is chamfered to receive the spring collet C, which is threaded to the end of draw-back rod Z>. The work is not gripped directly by the spring collet, but is first screwed into a special bushing E, having thin walls as shown. This bushing is not split but springs sufficiently to permit it to be closed in on the work and
released
when the collet pressure is removed. A flange G attached to the end of the spindle nose serves as a stop for the work and a gaging point for the operations. The regular collet closing mechanism is used, but as may be seen in the left-hand end, the finger holders are reversed. When the clutch ring is pushed forward by the chuck-closer gripping fingers / swivel and draw rod D backward through is moved contact with flange /. When the clutch ring
MAKING FUSE PARTS
161
FORMING TOOL
PILOTED
COUNTERBORING AND FACING TOOL
Machinery
Fig.
15.
Diagram
Set-up for machining Timing Train Rings on "Gridley" Automatic

illustrating
backward, the gripping fingers release rod D, relieving the pressure of the collet on bushing E and the work. Referring again to Fig. 13, the second series of operations on the fuse body is shown to the right of the illustration. At the first spindle position, forming tool / advances and forms the exterior diameters, while drill / drills the hole
162
MAKING FUSE PARTS
At the second spindle position, the rear part of in the end. the work is supported by a roll back-rest, while the regular turner takes a cut across and chamfers the shoulder. At the same time counterbore L comes in, cleans up the drilled At the third spindle position, hole and faces the bottom. with a plain die. At the fourth the diameter is threaded operated from the turret cuts a spindle position, a tool series of concentric grooves in the flange of the fuse body. The grooving tool is cut away to clear the forming tool O which takes a light cut over the grooved face, finishing the
body as illustrated. The Machining the Stationary Timing Train Ring. machining operations on the stationary timing train ring are shown to the left in Fig. 15, and as can be seen are of
a comparatively simple nature.
This fuse part
is
made
from a Tobin bronze bar in a 2% -inch "Gridley" multipleAt the first spindle position, a drill spindle automatic. held on the turret drills the hole, and a forming tool on the cross-slide forms it to shape and breaks it down for the cut-off tool. At the second spindle position, the piece is and at the third position it is faced off with an reamed,
under-cutting tool. In the fourth spindle position, not shown, the finished piece is cut off, and the stock is fed out. The Machining the Graduated Timing Train Ring. train ring machining operations on the graduated timing are almost identical with the stationary ring and are shown diagrammatically to the right in Fig. 15. This part is also made from a bar of Tobin bronze in a 2%-inch "Gridley" multiple-spindle automatic. The only difference in the operations on this part is in the use of a combination floating counterbore, and facing tool provided with a roller pilot. Machining the Closing Cap and Bottom Closing Screw. The closing cap and bottom closing screw for the shrapnel timing fuse are made from brass rod with a comparatively simple tool set-up as
shown
in Fig. 16.
The machine
a 1%-inch "Gridley" multiple-spindle automatic. The machining operations on the closing cap are shown to the left in the illustration, and consist in drilling, counter-
used
is
boring, forming, threading, and cutting
off.
The opera-
MAKING FUSE PARTS
163
COUNTERBORE
FORMING TOOL
FLAT FORMING TOOL.
CUTTING-OFF 'TOOL CUTTING-OFF
TOOL
Machinery
Fig. 16.
Diagram illustrating Set-ups for machining Closing Cap and Bottom Closing Screw on "Gridley" 1%-inch Multiple-spindle Automatic
164
tions on the
this
MAKING FUSE PARTS

bottom closing screw, shown
are
counterboring,
off.
to the right of
illustration,
forming,
recessing,
threading, and cutting
*/
FEED STOCK TO STOP
DRILL
BOTTOM HOLE
REAM AND "BOTTOM" HOLES
CUT-OFFTOOL ON
BACK SLIDE
Machinery
Fig.
17.
Method
Brown
&
machining Fuse Hammer on a No. 2 Model G Sharpe Automatic Screw Machine equipped with -an Eight-hole Turret
of
Making Fuse Parts on Brown & Sharpe Automatic and Hand Screw Machines. A brief description of two of the
many
interesting set-ups on Brown & Sharpe automatic and hand screw machines for making timing fuse parts
MAKING FUSE PARTS

is
165
Timing fuse parts are made from several different materials. The screws and other small members as a rule are made from brass rod, whereas
given in the following
1
from sheet
the parts such as the capsules, primer cups, etc., are made brass. Other members, such as the fuse body
FORM AND CUT-OFF

ERTICAL SLIDE TOOL
Machinery
Fig. 18.
Diagram illustrating Method of Machining a Fuse Nut on a No. 6 Brown & Sharpe Hand Screw Machine
or stem, are
made from
different alloys
and metals such as
copper, copper aluminum, aluminum, etc. The method of Set-up for Making Fuse Hammers. making a fuse hammer on a No. 2 Model G Brown & Sharpe automatic screw machine provided with a special eight-hole turret is shown diagrammatically in Fig. 17. This part is
166
MAKING FUSE PARTS
made from %-inch round brass rod and is finished complete in the screw machine. First, the stock is fed out to the stop in the turret. Second, the end is centered and faced with tools held in tool-holder A. The body is then
formed with a circular tool B working from the front crossslide at the same time the turret is revolved, bringing tap drill C into operation. The forming tool is working at the same time as the drills. The turret is again revolved and drill D for finishing the middle hole is brought in and com;
At the next index of the turret, drill pletes its operation. finishes the bottom hole. The turret is now indexed and a
carrying tool F advances and is brought into operation to recess the work by a pusher on the cross-slide. The turret is again indexed and a reamer G is advanced to bottom and ream the holes. Upon the next index of the turret, tap threads the work, which is The stock is rotated at finally cut off with circular tool /. 973 R. P. M. forward and backward for drilling and turnThe stock ing, and at 421 R. P. M. forward for threading. is cut off rotating backward. The surface speed for the forming tools is 220 feet per minute and 31 feet per minute
recessing tool-holder
for the tap. Tool Set-up for Making Fuse Nut. The fuse nut on the Russian timing fuse is made from 1 %-inch round brass rod in a No. 6 wire-feed Brown & Sharpe hand-screw machine as shown in Fig. 18. First the stock is fed out to length, being gaged by a stop in a vertical slide, which is held in the turret. The turret is then indexed and drill A drills the large hole. The turret is now revolved and the combination drill B is advanced. The turret is again revolved and counterbore C faces and counterbores the work. Upon the next index of the turret, a vertical slide tool-holder is advanced. This tool-holder is carrying recessing tool operated by a handle attached to the holder. The turret is threads the work. After this the again indexed and tap turret is indexed and the work is recessed with a tool-holder F carrying two cutters which balance each other in cutting. The seventh operation is performed from both the front and rear cross-slides with tools G and H. The eighth oper-
MAKING FUSE PARTS

ation
is
167
This is performed with a special verticutting off. cal slide tool-holder held in the turret and operated by a The stock for these operations is rotated at 352 handle. R. P. M., giving a surface speed for the forming tools of 180 feet per minute and 66 feet per minute for the tap.
Making Fuse Parts on Hand Screw Machines.
The
de-
mand
for shrapnel fuse parts has been so great that time has not been taken in all cases to tool up automatic screw machines before production has been started. In order to get parts out quickly while automatic machines are being tooled up, hand screw machines have been made use of.
Fig. 19.
Machining Fuse Parts on F. E. Wells Hand Screw Machine
&
Son's
These machines are also used to a large extent on small orders and to help out production in general. Fig. 19 shows an F. E. Wells & Son Co. hand-screw machine working on shrapnel fuse parts. The capacity of this machine inch is for %-inch diameter rod and it will tap or drill diameter. Shrapnel fuse parts are produced on this machine at the rate of from 25 to 100 pieces per hour.
Primers for Fuses. The percussion used in the American combination fuse shown in primer, Fig. 3, Chapter I, is made in a Brown & Sharpe automatic screw machine from brass rod in two operations. FollowDrilling Percussion
168
MAKING FUSE PARTS
ing the screw machine operations, four holes about 1/32 inch in diameter are drilled through this bushing, employing a special "snap index" jig in a high-speed ball-bearing drilling machine made by the Leland-Gifford Co. of WorThe extremely small size of cester, Mass. (See Fig. 20.) this part makes it difficult to handle, so the jig was designed
Fig. 20.
Drilling Percussion
Primers on a Leland-Gifford Ball Bearing Sensitive Drilling Machine
with a special loading arm to facilitate rapid handling. The jig consists of a platform base bolted to the table of the drilling machine. Upon this is the index ring, which is turned by handles / and indexed for the four drilling positions
by spring plunger /. The center of rotation is in the center of the four holes in the part. B is the loading
MAKING FUSE PARTS

lever,
169
ped. in the swinging
with a nest A at the end into which the work is slipThis lever swings on stud C. The work is located
the illustration, with the
The arm
is
arm B when it is in the position shown in arm B resting against stop D. then swung under the drill until it reaches stop
E. It is maintained in this position by spring plunger that bears against lever F, fulcrumed on stud G. The side of this lever bears against the work and holds it firmly
Fig. 21. Drilling
Fuse Plugs on "Avey" Drilling Machine
while the drilling is proceeding. The drill is guided by four bushings in plate L, mounted on the index ring. The operation consists in rotating the index ring to the four
stations for drilling the respective holes. quick-indexing ring, and the high speed at
By means of this which the Lelandmany
Gifford drilling machine runs, it is possible to drill as as 6000 pieces, or 24,000 holes in ten hours.
170
Drilling
MAKING FUSE PARTS
lar No.
An application of a reguTiming Fuse Plugs. "Avey" drilling machine, built by the Cincinnati Pulley Machinery Co., Cincinnati, Ohio, to the drilling of
brass timing fuse plugs is shown in Fig. 21. The requirements are to drill three No. 55 (0.052 inch) holes through the dome of the plug a number of pieces are shown on the
;
table of the machine.
These
three
holes
topractically at the inside gether
run
of the dome,
it
making
necessary to drill one hole at a time. The fixture used for
this
purpose is of unique construction.

of an
The body A is made aluminum cast-
ing, whereas the operating mechanism

is
of
hardened
tool
steel.
The
drill spin-
dle is operated
by a
foot treadle, connection being secured
through rod B, passing down through the fixture and fastened to the spindle
sleeve
by
the
piece
Q
L-
shaped
yoke C.
Fig.
22.
and
The work
-_
on
Graduating Timing Fuse Rings Dwight-Slate Marking Machine
iîj
C rm/ial
the fixture that is through the medium of rod

inside
work-spindle located indexed one-third revolution B upon the raising of the drill
spindle
The work holding-down and ejecting supported in aluminum bracket F. Attached to this bracket is a supporting arm for the lower crank of
sleeve.
is
mechanism
MAKING FUSE PARTS

lever G,
171
which holds a segment gear. Bracket

bushing.
carries
the
drill
After drilling the third hole, the operator depresses lever G, rotating the segment gear meshing in rack teeth in rod
H, which lifts the latter up to eject the work and at the same time through a connection, not shown, raises the holding-down rod. The ejector, not shown, which is spring controlled, returns to a neutral position immediately upon
the ejection of the work, while the holding-down rod is still raised. The work, after being discharged, falls into a chute and is carried to the rear of the machine. The operation of this fixture is rapid, the production being from 9000 to 10,000 pieces in ten hours.
Graduating Fuse Timing Ring.
As has been previously
stated, the adjustable ring on the timing fuse is graduated in seconds, starting at zero and running to twenty-one sec-
in Fig. 22, the graduating of this timing performed in the Dwight-Slate marking machine built by Noble & Westbrook, Hartford, Conn. The main arbor of the machine carries the stamping roll A and is turned by the handle shown. The timing ring to be graduated and marked is held at B. The two gears C prevent the stamp from "creeping" ahead or slipping on the work. The work-holding arbor, as shown, is held in a bracket and is raised to the stamp roll by pressure on the foot treadle. Two operations are required for stamping and graduating the timing ring. The first is marking the graduations and the second is putting on the figures.
onds.
As shown
ring
is
CHAPTER
VI
MAKING SHRAPNEL CARTRIDGE CASES

brass cartridge case that contains the powder for propelling the shrapnel shell from the bore of charge the quick-firing gun is drawn up from a blank of sheet
brass.
shell
THE
The number
its
case depends on
of operations necessary to complete the size and the method of handling. Some
manufacturers prefer to do more or less drawing at one operation, but in all cases the sequence of operations is practically the same. The material used for shrapnel
cartridge cases generally consists of a composition of 2 parts copper and 1 part zinc. This alloy has been found to possess the best physical qualities, that is, great tensile strength and a high percentage of elongation when properly
annealed. The drawing operations through which the cartridge case passes increase the hardness, and the ductility of the metal is restored by annealing. The annealing temperature in most cases is from 1150 to 1200 degrees F. On reaching this temperature, the work is either cooled off in water or allowed to cool off gradually, as the speed of cooling does not affect its physical qualities. In the following, two methods of handling the various operations will be described.
Method of Making Cartridge Cases. 1 and 2 Figs. show the sequence of operations blanking, cupping, redrawing, indenting, trimming, heading, and tapering, as advocated by the Waterbury Farrel Foundry & Machine Co., Waterbury, Conn., for making cartridge cases for 18pound shrapnel. The first operation consists in cutting out a blank from %-inch sheet brass 6% inches in diameter. The next operation is cupping. This is handled in a shortstroke geared straight-sided press. Before re-drawing, the cup is annealed, and the third operation, which is handled in a longer stroke press, is then performed. Annealing fol-
lows this operation, and then the fourth drawing or second re-drawing operation is performed. This consists in re172
CARTRIDGE CASES
173
&'
Mr
20
OPERATION-CUP
H
7TH
4-
>i
OPERATION-3D DRAW
k
3o
1J4
11
^
1sT
OPERATION
DRAW
k=
I
Mv y^.
*"4
51
I
STH OPERATION 4TH OPERATION-20
4TH
DRAW
DRAW
10TH OPERATION CUT Off ENO
DF CASE
STH
OPERATION-
1iT
INDENTING
4"
-+-K'
6TH
OPERATION
2o
INDENTING
&TM
OPERATION-DTH DRAW
Fig.
1.
Operations in making an "18-pound' Cartridge Case
174
CARTRIDGE CASES
ducing the fillets slightly at the corners, decreasing the diameter of the cup to 4% inches and increasing its length to 4% inches. The dimensions given here are approximate.
Indenting Operations. --The fifth operation or first indenting operation, which consists in indenting the bottom, is handled in a press similar to that used for the cupping and re-drawing operations. This shortens the length of the case by inch and forces the indentation about half way through the thickness of the stock. The second indenting is then accomplished. This again shortens the case by an additional 14 inch and squares up the corners.
The case, without annealing, is now passed through the third re-drawing, or seventh, operation, reducing its diameter to 4 inches and increasing its length to 5i/ inches. It 2
annealed after this operation, and is then drawn to a shape 8 inches in length by 3% inches in diameter, and the wall decreased in thickness to 1/16 inch. The case is then annealed and passes through the fifth re-drawing operation. The machine used for handling the third, fourth and fifth re-draws is a long-stroke straight-sided rack-and-pinion After the fifth re-drawing, or ninth, operation, the press. case is trimmed and about two inches cut off the end. This
is
leaves the case in better condition for the succeeding operations. The trimming machine is of the horizontal type. Final Re-drawing Operations. The sixth re-drawing, or eleventh, operation is performed in a horizontal drawing
press of the hydraulic type provided with automatic reversing valves. This operation increases the length of the case to 13*4 inches and reduces its diameter to 33/4 inches.
After this operation, the case is annealed and then 1% inch is trimmed off the open end. The thirteenth and fourteenth operations consist in heading the case. These are practically of the same nature, and combine to form the head of
the case as
shown
in the illustration.
The heading opera-
tions each reduce the length of the case 1/4 inch, and are performed in a 1000-ton hydraulic heading press operated by a geared compound power pump and having a working
pressure of 5600 pounds per square inch on the ram. After heading, the case is annealed and the fifteenth operation,
CARTRIDGE CASES
175
,12rn
OPERATION
TRIM CASE 12-INCH LONO
-Jt
IR-ru M
ODCDATI/Mu 1 ** TAO OPERATION-18T TAPERING
k
11TH
%-
?!
OPERATION-6TH DRAW
17TH
OPERATION TIM OFF V4"
,13TH AND
UTH OPERATIONS- HEADING
16TH
OPERATlON-2o TAPERING
Fig.
2.
Operations in making an "18-pound' Cartridge Case
176
CARTRIDGE CASES
is
which consists of tapering,
performed.
The
first
taper-
ing, or fifteenth, operation reduces the mouth of the case to 3 9/16 inches in diameter and gradually tapers it for a
distance of 5% inches half the length. The case is then annealed, pickled and washed, and a second tapering operation is performed. This reduces the mouth of the case to
3%
is
inches and tapers it completely to the head. The case not annealed after the last tapering operation, but 1/4 inch is trimmed off the end. The various operations through which a cartridge case passes in drawing and forming to the correct length having been described, attention will now be given to the type of tools used for this purpose. These tools have been designed and built by the Ferracute Machine Co., Bridgeton, N. J., and are used with its presses for making cases for 3-inch
projectiles.
Cupping and
First
Series
of
Re-drawing Tools.
The
cutting out of the blank is frequently omitted because the specified thickness and size can be furnished by the mill. Before cupping, the dies and blanks are well greased, as this assists in drawing. Olive oil or soapy water is used, de-
pending on the stage at which the drawing operations have arrived. The first cupping operation is accomplished with a punch and die as shown at A in Fig. 3. This operation is accomplished in a Ferracute 100-ton ram press equipped with a dial feed. The die consists of a hardened ring of tempered steel having an interior shape similar to a truncated cone. The punch is slightly tapered on the lower end and has an air vent hole drilled up through it to facilitate the drawing and produce a cup free from wrinkles. The second operation, or first re-drawing operation, is shown at B. Here the type of die used differs somewhat
from that shown
stead of 45 degrees.
at A, in that the drawing angle is 15 inThe cup, after this operation, is re-
duced in diameter to 3.877 inches and is 2% inches long. After the first cupping operation, the case is annealed. The second re-drawing operation is accomplished as shown at C. The die in this case is the same as at B, as is also the punch, except for an increase in the taper and change
CARTRIDGE CASES
177
I_OL
!
CO
|
OT.'T
_oj'
'~5
5TH
DRAW
HORIZONTAL SCREW PRESS
Machinery
Fig.
3.
Tools for drawing a 3-inch Shrapnel Cartridge Case Ferracute Machine Co.'s Method
in shape on the end. The object of this, of course, is to keep the case thick at the head but reduce the walls further up along the section. The case, after this operation, is also drawn out to a length sufficient to necessitate using a strip-
178
CARTRIDGE CASES
it
ping device for removing
from the punch.
This
is
accom-
plished by six spring-operated stripper pins as shown, which slip over the top edge of the case as it is forced through the
The cup now passes die, stripping it from the punch. through the third annealing operation and is ready for the The press used for performing third re-draw, shown at D.
this operation is similar to that described, and the die punch is similar in construction to that shown at C.
and
Final
Re-drawing Operations.
For the
final
re-drawing
operations, horizontal double-ended screw presses instead of the horizontal hydraulic presses formerly used are em-
Horizontal presses are used because the length to is drawn after the third re-draw is such that it exceeds the stroke of the vertical presses. The cartridge case, after each drawing operation, is annealed; E in Fig. 3 shows the fourth re-drawing tools, which are handled in a horizontal screw press. The die used is similar in shape to that shown at D, but the holder in which it is held differs, of course, owing to the difference in the type of press used. The stripping arrangement for removing the case from the punch is also of a different type. In this case five spring-operated stripper pins are held in a holder which is free to oscillate within certain limits in the block in which it is retained. The reason for having this oscillating stripper is that it accommodates itself to the irregular shape on the end of the case and gives practically a constant pressure all around the circumference of the The case case, assisting in removing it from the punch. Here is now annealed and is finish-drawn as shown at F. the same type of die, stripper arrangement, etc., is used as that shown at E. The case in the fifth re-drawing operation is 14% inches long by 3.186 inches outside diameter. As was preAnnealing and Washing Cartridge Cases. the cartridge case, after practically every viously stated, re-drawing operation, is annealed, being subjected to a temperature of about 1150 to 1200 degrees F. and then allowed to cool off or dipped in water which, of course, forms a scale on the surface of the case. This must be removed before any subsequent operations can take place. Several differployed.
which the cartridge case
CARTRIDGE CASES
179
ent solutions are used for this purpose, but a common one comprises the following Sulphuric acid diluted with water to a strength of 1 to 4. This pickling solution is held in lead-lined wooden troughs and the case is allowed to remain in the bath varying from eight to fifteen minutes, according to the strength of the solution. The cases are then washed in lead-lined wooden troughs through which a stream
:
of water
is circulated to remove all traces of the acid. The hardness of Testing Hardness of Cartridge Cases. a cartridge case must conform to a certain standard. When too soft, a permanent set will occur from the pressure of
Machinery
Fig.
4.
Fixture for testing Hardness of Cartridge Cases with Shore Scleroscope
the firing charge and the case will stick in the breech of the gun. When the hardness is too high for a given composition of brass, it is too brittle and will split, or the head may blow off. There is, therefore, a certain hardness which must be adhered to as closely as possible. Some manufacturers hold the standard to within 20 to 25 on the body walls and reject cases striking 15 as being too soft, and 30 to 35 as being too hard. Owing to the thinness of the walls of the case, it is impossible to take a reading without rigidly supporting it, and for this purpose the Shore Instrument & Mfg. Co.,
180
CARTRIDGE CASES
St.,
City, has devised a speThis comprises a bracket A held in an ordinary vise, to which is fastened an anvil plug B, as indicated. In order to hold the case tightly against the anvil plug, a spring C, fastened to the bracket A, is also fastened to a yoke D surrounding the case. A rod attached to the yoke and to a foot treadle furnishes a means of drawing the yoke down to hold the case in contact with
cial fixture as indicated in Fig. 4.
551-557 West 22nd
New York
the plug.
The
anvil plug provides the weight or inertia to
Fig.
5.
Special Shrapnel Case Trimming, Facing, and
Chamfering Machine
resist the
impact of the drop-hammer of the scleroscope, but in order to be sure that there is proper contact of the case with the plug a rubber cushion E is provided between the pressure ring or yoke and the brass case. The Bullard MaMachining Shrapnel Cartridge Cases. chine Tool Co., Bridgeport, Conn., has designed and built a number of special machines for performing the machining work on the head and mouth ends of brass cartridge
CARTRIDGE CASES
181
6TH OPERATION
Machinery
Fig.
6.
Sequence of Operations performed on Cartridge Case Machine shown in Fig. 5
in
This machine, as will be seen from Fig. 5, is of the hand turret machine type, designed to work on the case from both ends. In this machine the brass case is chucked in the center of an extremely large spindle, and worked on from the head end with four sets of turret tools and two sets of cross-slide tools, while the mouth end is bored and
cases.
182
CARTRIDGE CASES
trimmed with tools held on a carriage located on the back facing bar. The drive for the work chuck spindle is over a 16-inch pulley with a 3-inch belt. The pull of the belt is
not taken directly on the spindle, but on a special pulley bearing 7% inches in diameter and 5 inches in width. The spindle itself is supported in bearings 9 inches in length and 5% inches in diameter. As previously mentioned, the spindle is hollow so that any type of shrapnel cartridge case up to 414 inches in diameter and from 10 to 18 inches in length can be machined.
Fig.
7.
Set-up showing First Operation on Cartridge Case Head
From the construction of the machine in Fig. 5 it will be seen that the front end of the spindle carries a large three-jaw chuck of special design. These jaws catch the cartridge case just under the head and revolve it for maThe case is supported internally by a tubular chining. arbor which also acts as a stop and is attached to a rod extending to the rear bracket where it is backed up by a The front end of this tubular support or stop spring. is provided with a thrust ball bearing so that the case can be loaded in the chuck while the spindle is running. When the chuck operating lever is manipulated to close the chuck jaws on the work, it first draws back the rod mentioned
CARTRIDGE CASES
183
through the medium of a tie-rod and the rear bracket to a The positive stop, and then closes the jaws on the work. cartridge case is put in and removed from the chuck with
Fig.
Set-up showing Fourth Operation on Cartridge Case Head
Fig.
9.
Set-up showing Operations on Mouth End of Case
the turret indexed between stations to give the required

space.
The back boring and trimming head is held on a hollow spindle through the center of which the rod passes. This
184
spindle
is
CARTRIDGE CASES
provided with rack teeth on
its
top surface
which engage with a pinion located in the extension bracket and operated by a handle. The forward position of the boring and trimming head is governed by a stop-collar.
Fig. 10.
Set-up showing Sixth Operation on Head End of Case
Fig.
11.
Set-up showing Seventh Operation on Head End of Case
Sequence of Machining Operations on Cartridge Case. -The sequence of machining operations performed on the
o>
<D
03
O
0)
cp r<
JH
g^
^
tfl
OQ
0)
43
CQ
SI
^H
,i_j
11 O
!>
e O
.2 .a
4-i
&
-t->
<
S^JI|S 1^ o^|^ 111 S a a O

03
.3?
S *
<> .g ^^2.5 ho
,
* >. "'
'
5
v>
S O
^p
g^ 3 ^
.
f-t
a s
a)
:I3
S
.22
JL
H-
^ O
.^
bo
ill
tj_j
I'SjJiJll
CD
b>^
O2
Li
**
K
-M
02^
O Illllll ^^
,
186
CARTRIDGE CASES
The following operations are now performed on the mouth or open end of the cartridge case as shown in Figs. 6 and 9, with the spindle running at the same speed 500 R. P. M.
H and / are
as that used for the first series of operations. Two tools used. Tool bores the mouth of the case for
a distance of 1 inch, whereas tool / trims off the open end The mouth of the case of the case and rounds the edges. at the rear end of the spindle is supported by a hardened
4TH OPERATION
FRONT CROSS-SLIDE BLOCK
2ND
OPERATION
Machinery
Fig.
13.
Diagram illustrating Machining Operations on French Cartridge Case on Potter & Johnston Machine
bushing to prevent it springing away from the action of the boring tool. The boring and trimming tools are mounted in a special head J, Fig. 9, that is operated back and forth by a handle K through the medium of a rack The forward movement of this head, as and pinion. previously explained, is controlled by means of an adjustable collar L screwed onto spindle M.
CARTRIDGE CASES
187
The work-spindle is now slowed down and the following operations, shown in Figs. 6, 10, and 11, are performed on the head end of the case. The sixth operation is to finishcounterbore and ream the primer pocket with tool O held
FIRST
OPERATION
THIRD OPERATION
RECESSING TOOL
SIDE
"""
ELEVATION
CAM ON CROSS-SLIDE FOR OPERATING VERTICAL SLIDE TOOL
Fig.
14.
Tooling Set-up for Machining Cartridge Case
18-pound
in an adjustable holder, whereas the seventh operation is threading the primer pocket with collapsible tap P. The chuck lever in Fig. 5 is now manipulated, first, releasing the grip of the chuck jaws on the case and, second, advanc-
188
CARTRIDGE CASES
ing the rod to eject the case sufficiently to enable it to be The spindle is changed easily removed from the chuck. to the highest speed after the next case is put in. In changing the work, it is not necessary to stop the spindle.
Machining Shrapnel Cartridge Cases on Potter & Johnston
The cartridge case is made from sheet brass as previously stated. It is practically formed to shape in and heading machines, but to secure the desired drawing accuracy on the head and primer pocket these surfaces are
Automatics.
Fig. 15.
Tool Set-up for Machining 18-pound Cartridge Case
machined. The method of holding the French 75-millimeter case on a No. 5A Potter & Johnston automatic chucking and turning machine for machining the head and primer pocket is shown in Fig. 12. Here it will be seen that the
cartridge case butts up against a stop
tapered plug C, which steadies
and fits over the held in place by an ordinary draw-in collet D. This is operated by means of a lever E, fulcrumed to a bracket on the rear end of the
it.
It is
machine and operating a sliding clutch
collar.
The chuck
CARTRIDGE CASES
is
189
sleeve
operated through fingers which draw back the sliding to which it is attached. These fingers operate against a spring at the rear of the spindle which serve to
open the collet. The machining operations on the French shrapnel cartridge case are handled in the manner illustrated in Fig. 13.
The first operation is to rough-drill the hole in the head. The turret is then indexed, bringing in a roughing reamer
which reams the hole previously
cross-slide carries tool
drilled,
whereas the front
that faces the head and a circular tool C that rough-forms the external diameters of the head. counterUpon the next indexing of the turret, the tool
bores the powder pocket and the circular forming tool The last operfinish-forms and rough-chamfers the head. ation consists in finishing the primer pocket with a taper reamer F. The Machining the British Shrapnel Cartridge Case. brass cartridge case for the British shrapnel is more difficult to machine than the French case, as reference to Figs. 14 and 15 will clearly show. The machining operations are accomplished on a No. 5A Potter & Johnston automatic chucking and turning machine having a fivesided turret. The first operation is to drill the primer pocket hole with a three-step drill A. The turret is now indexed and the surfaces previously roughed out are finished with inserted-blade counterbore B. At the same time, the head of the case is faced with a relieving tool C held on the cross-slide and rough-formed with circular tool D. The turret, in being indexed to the third position, brings vertical recessing tool E into operation. This carries two cutters, one of which recesses the primer pocket at the point where the thread is to terminate, whereas the other removes the burr and faces the inner boss. In the fourth operation, the smallest diameter of the primer pocket is reamed and the largest diameter of the hole chamfered by tools held in bar F. The rear cross-slide is advanced at the same time, carrying the circular tool G that finish-forms the head. The final operation threading is performed with the "Geometric" collapsible tap H.
.2^5
c
O^
i
III
;
O
-4-3
SS
^
>>
II
PQ
Q
190
ZO
00 T*
O CO
OO ^^
^l
O O ^H
GO TH
OO CO CO
Tt<
GO 00 OO GO
3 g 3
WWW
8
o -o 3 g o o TH
-tS
A* gg
o
-M
e" e~
8~
be
^>
o>
.2
II
I-
s l
w
l^l SftSI
to
t^
*!
.
3
a
o to
GO
>
CO
TH
1~>
il
CO
t00
co'
tco*
^H
,
bJO rt
S
'ra
:R *Q
fftll ijliliMtii illlllllllff 111 1 iiîii-iiiiit ^ w |||fi||i| s| lii

'-SJtJJgjIJe^
CO
S ^.&l !R'Pw g.a*H ^ M>ef P.3^C
^&.S
-t-
"w
"H
3 03 j3 rrj
'O
.
bC bC
C3
bO
!*
g|s?
2
00
rH
i-t
OSO-r-i
rH(MW <M CO WW
191
192
CARTRIDGE CASES
of Operations
on Cartridge Cases. The acof the cupping, drawing, annealing, indenting, trimming, heading and machining operations on a British 18-pound cartridge case of a composition of 70 parts electrolytic copper and 30 parts Bertha In the plant where this information was obtained, spelter. the cupping, indenting, and first, second, third, and fourth redrawing operations are accomplished on bulldozers, while the fifth and sixth redrawing operations are accomplished on a frog and switch planer from which the cross-head has been removed and a special fixture substituted in its place. The punch is held rigidly in this fixture and the die on another fixture clamped to the table of the planer. PractiHere the cally the same condition prevails on bulldozers. is held rigidly, whereas the die is held in the travelpunch ing slide. As a lubricant for drawing a compound known as "viscosity," manufactured by the Cataract Refining Co., is used throughout, except on the fourth and fifth redrawing operations, where ordinary commercial vaseline has been found to give the best results. The annealing is done in a Quigley oil furnace, which is kept at a constant temperature of between 1100 and 1140 degrees F. The cups are handled in sheet iron boxes with wire bottoms carrying 140 cups. This furnace holds seven of these boxes it requires 35 minutes for one lot of cups to pass completely through the furnace. In other words, a box is put in and taken out every five minutes, thus giving an annealing time of thirty-five minutes on each batch. After dipping in water, the cups are immersed in a weak
Summary
companying
table gives a
summary
solution of sulphuric acid to
remove
all scale.
Scleroscope readings are taken before and after each drawing operation, so as to ascertain whether the metal is being properly annealed or not. The blank also is tested with a sclerescope before any work is done on it, and should 'strike 15. The head of the shell must strike between 40 and 50, being softer at the center than at the rim. The readings are taken on four radii on the head, and at intervals of Vs to 3/16 inch apart. In heading, considerable difficulty was at first experienced in securing the correct scle-
CARTRIDGE CASES
193
roscope readings. Instead of the head being harder at the rim than at the center, the reverse was the case. It was found that the metal in flowing towards the center packed up to such an extent that the case was made considerably
harder at this point.

culty consisted in
method which overcame this diffidrilling a %-inch hole down through the
primer pocket previous to the heading operation. This allowed the metal to flow towards the center of the head with comparatively little resistance, and hence the correct hardness was obtained at the rim, as well as in the center of the head. The machining of the head and mouth is accomplished in Bullard special cartridge case trimming machines of the double-ended type, that is, one set of tools are located in one end for machining the mouth and another set of tools held in the turret and on the cross-slide for machining the
head and primer pocket. Following this, hand-reaming and hand-tapping operations are accomplished so as to get the desired accuracy and fit in the primer pocket. Inspecting and stamping operations finish the principal operations on
the cartridge case.
CHAPTER
VII
SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE MANUFACTURE AND INSPECTION OF THE RUSSIAN 3-INCH SHRAPNEL SHELL
The following
specifications relating to the 3-inch Russian
from the official specifications, shrapnel and contain all the essential points required to be known by the manufacturer or the inspector of shrapnel shells. The specifications deal in detail with what is known as the "test consignment" of shells, the "proof consignment" of shells, and the methods of inspecting. Clause 1 General Conditions. The shrapnel shell consists of the following parts steel body with copper driving band, steel diaphragm, steel fuse tube, steel fuse base, brass socket nut, bullets, two steel fixing screws, two steel threaded plugs, and a zinc plug. The selection of the material to be used for the shell and the parts is left to the discretion of the manufacturer, but on the condition that it meets the requirements given in the following specifications. Before beginning the manufacture of an order, the manufacturer must submit a test consignment of shells. Clause 2. Test Consignment of Shells. The selection of shells for the test consignment is left to the discretion of the manufacturer. The trials of the test consignment are carried out in the presence of the inspector appointed by the government for which the shells are made, and of the representative of the firm whose shells are tested. The methods of manufacture of the test consignment of shells must be known to the inspector and must be done in accordance with the requirements in the following specifications. All shells forming the test consignment must be similar in material and made by the same methods of manufacture. The submission of the test consignment is not required for those firms who have already submitted one, and after the completion of an order have received a new order for the same shells, provided the mechanical conditions for
shell are abstracted
. :
194
RUSSIAN SHRAPNEL SHELL
195
manufacturing the same have not been altered. Firms are allowed to begin the manufacture of the shells before delivering the test consignment, but on the condition that in the
case of unsatisfactory results of the trials of the test consignment, all shells previously manufactured by the firm
must be rejected. The test consignment consists of fifty shrapnels, out of which twenty-five are tested, by firing, with a view to ascertaining their accuracy and strength, twenty-two for strength only, and three shrapnels are left for mechanical tests by breaking the test pieces made from them in a testing machine. In the case of the last three shells it is necessary to ascertain before cutting the test pieces from them that the driving bands are pressed on correctly, by removing them. In addition to this, the strength of the shrapnels is tested by exploding them in a pit. For the pit test, those shells are used which are found undamaged after being fired. For this trial, ten shrapnels are used. Before firing the test consignment of shrapnels and before the pit test, the mechanical test must be carried out, and the two first mentioned tests may be carried out only if the metal shows results answering the conditions mentioned in Clause 3 of these specifications.
The test consignment will be considered as passed if the following results are obtained 1. If during the mechanical tests the metal answers to the conditions laid down.
:
during firing no shell is broken in the gun or immein front of the muzzle. diately 3. If during firing no socket is separated from the shell in the gun or immediately in front of the muzzle.
2.
If
4. If on cylindrical parts of the bodies of shrapnels recovered after firing no signs of the rifling are to be found. The slight impression from rifling on the central portion of the shell cannot, however, be taken as a reason for the rejection of the shell, provided that it is noticed only on onehalf of the circumference. 5. If shrapnels recovered after firing do not show any dent in their bases or shearing of the socket, or if the in-
196
SMOKE COMPOSITION ASSEMBLY

8.8
lti8+".OlJ"
0.04-
4*iJ8-
SECTION THROUGH B-B

/f
DIAPHRAGM
DIA.
STEEL
THREADS PER INCH
0-1875
TAPPED HOLE, 24 THREADS PER INC*
0.375 DIA. TAPPED HOLE, 16 THREADS PE FOR FILLING SHELL WITH RESIN AND TO BE AFTERWARDS PLUGGED
5.5695
CENTRAL TUBE
STEEL
24 THREADS PER INCH
j<
0.3r
H
STEEL
NG SCREW FOR FUSt SOCKET 2 REQUIRED
FIXING
SCREW FOR FUSE 1REOU.REO,
STEEL
DRIVING BAND
COPPER
SCREWED PLUG
STEE
Fig.
1.
Russian 3-Inch Shrapnel Shell and Component Parts
197
crease in the diameter of the cylindrical part of the body does not exceed 0.010 inch. If shrapnels recovered after the firing do not show in 6. more than 15 per cent of the cases the protrusion of the upper end of the central tube from the countersink of the brass socket nut. All these shrapnels must be dismantled for the inspection of the central tubes; the central tubes must not show any considerable sign of buckling, cracks or protrusion into the powder chamber. If during pit test, shrapnels do not show any 7. (a) breaking away of the bases, if their bodies be found intact, and if the same results be found on the shrapnels picked
up after
(b)
firing.
than
8.
If out of ten shrapnels tested in the pit not three show broken bodies.
If shrapnels
more
do not show the separation of driving
bands from the shell, nor displacement of same, if loosely fixed, and the accuracy of the firing in a vertical plane be not below the requirements given in Clause 19. The signs of the rifling on the driving bands of the recovered shells should be correct and not enlarged.
If the results of the trial of the test consignment give unsatisfactory results with reference to any of the above seven first conditions, or to all of them, the firm will be allowed to submit a second test consignment. In the case of unsatisfactory results of the test consignment with reference to the eighth condition, the firm has the right to submit additionally twenty-five shrapnels for accuracy firing trials only, but these shrapnels must also answer to the other seven If the trials of the test consignment show satisconditions. factory results, the firm may proceed with the manufacture of shrapnels, but under the condition that the material and method of manufacture will be similar to those used for the manufacture of the test consignment. In the case of unsatisfactory results of the test of the
second test consignment, the contracting government has the right to cancel the order with the firm for delivery of the shrapnels in question. All the test consignments of shrapnels must be at the contracting firm's expense.
198
Clause 3.
Breaking Tests of the Material used for Bodies. must be carried out at the works where shrapThree flat test pieces must be cut nels are manufactured. from the cylindrical portion of the body parallel to its axis and immediately above the driving band. The dimensions of test pieces are as follows Width, 0.750 inch thickness, The outline 0.150 inch; distance between marks, 2 inches. and dimension of the ends must suit the holders of the The metal of the bodies will be considtesting machine. ered satisfactory if it shows a breaking strength of 82.7
These
tests
kilograms per square millimeter (52.5 tons per square inch) with a final elongation of not less than 8 per cent. In addition to this, the inspector must select two bodies from the test consignment before the beginning of final machining for cutting from the round test pieces with a diameter of 0.3 inch, length 2 inches between marks, three test pieces being cut from each shell. The breaking test of these test pieces must be carried out on the testing machine, and the elastic limit of the material must be ascertained on them. As Clause 4. The Proof Consignment of Shrapnels. mentioned, the shrapnels under order must be manufactured from similar material and by similar methods to the shrapThe acceptance of shrapnels nels of the test consignment. for the service, however, can be effected only after "proof tests" of the mechanical qualities of the metal used, of the accuracy of firing, and of the strength and proper assem-
and pit tests. The whole order is sub-divided into consignments of 5000 shrapnels each. The method of manufacture of the shrapnels must be entirely the same for the whole consignment. In the case of the order being placed for a number of
bling,
shrapnel less than 5000, the whole order will be treated as one proof consignment in the case of the order being placed for a larger number of shrapnels, the remainder from a full proof consignment must be treated as a part of the previous consignment, when it is less than half of the proof consignment, and must form a separate proof consignment when it is more than half of same.
;
199
of shrapnels for proof must be made by the inspector personally from the proof consignment submitted by the firm. The choice must be made after final inspection
The choice
The works have the right to of the whole consignment. the shrapnels chosen by the inspector for the challenge The shrapnels proof, having the right to do it only twice.
challenged in that manner must be destroyed, so as to prevent any further submission of same for proof. The shrapnels challenged must be replaced by the firm. For the mechanical tests of the metal, it is recommended to select bodies which were rejected on account of their dimensions, but in the case of the absence of any bodies rejected for the dimensions, the works must provide good Not less than ten bodies bodies selected by the inspector. must be chosen from the proof consignment. The rules and requirements for the metal used for the shrapnel bodies were given in Clause 3. In the case of satisfactory results of these mechanical tests, the firm must submit from each proof consignment fifty shrapnels for the firing trials for their strength. After firing trials, the pit tests must be carried out, for which proof recovered shrapnels which do not show any damage after firing will be used. Ten shrapnels must be used for
pit tests.
All proof tests must be carried out in the presence of the inspector sent for this purpose to the works, and the mechanical tests of the metal must be carried out by the in-
spector himself.
The projectiles used for the proof firing must not be painted but only covered with machine oil. The consignment will be accepted if the mechanical or firing proof tests fulfill the same requirements as have been
laid
down
tion that in Condition
in Clause 2, Conditions 1 to 8, with the excep6, in the case of the proof test, 20
per cent, instead of 15 per cent, as in the case of the consignment test, may show protrusion of the upper end of the central tube from the countersink of the brass socket nut. If, during firing, breakages of the shrapnels in the gun or immediately in front of the muzzle should occur, the whole consignment must be rejected.
200
In the case of unsatisfactory results with reference to mentioned in Clause 2, Conditions 3, 4, 5, and 6 (which must not be more than one shell with reference to Conditions 3, 4, and 5), the firm has the right to submit 100 additional shrapnels chosen by the inspector for the If during pit tests more than firing for recovery proof. three shrapnel bodies are broken, an additional five shrapnels must be subjected to the same test, but for the acceptance of the consignment it is required that, in total, no more than five broken shrapnel bodies occur. With reference to damaged or displaced driving bands, or the impression of the rifling on them not being clear, or being enlarged, it is left to the discretion of the contracting government to demand the changing of the driving bands on the whole consignment, after which rebanding they must be submitted for second proof, twenty-five shrapnels being tested for accuracy these shrapnels must be chosen by the If durinspector after reviewing the whole consignment. the secondary firing trials which take place on account ing of failures with reference to any one of the above-mentioned reasons, further failures to the same effect take place, the question of the acceptance of the whole consignment must be referred to the respective military administration. In the case of the failures of both trials, first and secondary, the permission for the further manufacture of projectiles by the firm in question will be left to the discretion of the respective military authorities. In the case of the acceptance of the consignment after the proof, the shrapnels used for the proof in question, fifty in number, must be taken from the order. Any other used for proof in addition to the above-mentioned shrapnels, number, must be at the expense of the manufacturer. Clause 5. The Rights and Duties of the Government The inspector's duty consists not only in the Inspector. of the manufactured shrapnels, but also in lookacceptance ing after the methods, etc., used in the manufacture. In order to do this, the inspector must be given the right of access to any work and test referring to the shrapnel manufacture.
trials
:
201
The inspector has the right to inform the manager of the works of all defects noticed by him in manufacture of the shrapnels, as well as of those which occur in the shrapnels submitted for acceptance, and he has the right to suggest improvements to the manufacturer ; cretion of the manager of the works to
it is left
to the dis-
make use
of these
suggestions, if it is found advisable, but the inspector has not the right to interfere with the orders issued in the
works. Before submitting to the inspector the shrapnels manufactured the works must pass them by their own examiners these examiners must work to the instructions given to them by the works, and prepared to the inspector's satisThe inspector has to gage shrapnels by the gages faction. He also must check stated in the following specifications. them with reference to their dimensions, as given on the
;
drawings, before beginning inspection. Clause 6. The Condition in which Shrapnel Bodies are Steel shrapnel bodies are submitted to the Submitted. first inspection without socket, driving band, and inner
parts. The outside cylindrical portion of the bodies as well as the enlarged centering portion must be machined and fin-
shrapnel bodies must be submitted with grooves for driving bands and with other grooves in the base of the shell. The rounded portion of the bodies above the enlarged centering portion must be machined only preliminarily. The inside of the bodies must be finish-machined, and the shoulder for the diaphragm as well as the cylindrical portion of the body against the diaphragm must be properly finished the upper part of the inside surface must be provided with threads for socket. The remaining portion of the inside surface might be roughly machined. The base of the shrapnels may be left with a boss outside with center marked on it, but the remaining portion of the base must be finish-machined. This applies to the first inspection. Clause 7. The First Inspection of Shrapnel Bodies. The surface of the enlarged centering portion must be perfectly smooth and the cylindrical portion of the bodies must not show any tool-marks, except slight ones. The
ished
; ;
202
outer surfaces of the central portion and the enlarged centering portion must be polished. Special care must be taken The inside in polishing the enlarged centering portion. surface of the bodies must be clean and smooth. The outer and inner surfaces of shrapnels must not show any cracks, fissures, or black lines (not even the very slightest of
The inner surface of the bodies may these), nor burrs. show separate dents due to slag, but these dents must be of a very slight nature. The thread in the upper end of the
bodies for the socket
Clause
Bodies.
8.
must have at least five full turns. The Checking of the Weight of Shrapnel
Out of each one hundred bodies submitted to the These inspector, at least ten bodies must be weighed.
weights will assist the inspector with reference to the dimensions of the bodies, and might draw his attention to the dimensions of those parts for measuring of which there are no gages provided. In addition to this, during the
manufacture of the test consignment, the inspector must ascertain the mean weight of the shrapnel bodies in this consignment, as well as any possible variation in any direction. Clause 9. Inspection and Test of Copper for Driving Bands. Pure copper is used for the driving bands. It must be of the best quality, and hard drawn ordinary cop;
The per, not drawn, must not be used for driving bands. must be cut into pieces of the lengths recopper strips quired for their placing on the shrapnels. The copper strips must be submitted to the inspector for acceptance and for the following tests: 1. The strips must be bent double in cold condition until the ends meet; when the ends meet, the strip is hammered until both halves are flat if during this test the strip does not show any cracks or breakages, the metal will be considered as accepted.
;
2.
The
strip is
is
hammered
in cold condition until its

trial it
thickness
reduced one-half; after this
must not
show any fissures or cracks. Not more than 1 per cent

be subjected to the above
of the strips submitted must
tests-.
203
If it is found that any of the strips tested will not stand the tests, the whole consignment of strips is rejected, or is returned to the firm for reviewing, so as to give the firm the possibility to submit again that part of the consignment
which might be considered good.
During secondary test another 1 per cent of strips will be chosen, and in the case of any failures the whole consignment will be finally
rejected.
In case of satisfactory results in the tests mentioned, the inspector examines the copper strips so as to ascertain that they are of proper cross-section; special notice must be taken with reference to fissures. Fissures exceeding onetenth of the strip in length are not allowed. The inspector must examine 20 per cent of all strips, and, during this
examination, if even one strip be found with fissures longer than mentioned, the whole consignment of strips will be returned to the firm for reviewing. If during secondary examination the inspector finds even one fissure exceeding the mentioned length, the whole consignment of copper will be
rejected.
Clause 10.
Fixing of Driving Bands.
To prevent cracks
in shrapnel bodies during the fixing of the driving bands, a mandrel must be placed inside the bodies, and this mandrel must fit the inside surface of the bodies tightly. The
inspection of the grooves must be carried out by means of the gages made by the firm to suit the inspector's requirements. To facilitate the fixing of the driving bands on the shrapnel bodies, the bottom of the grooves may be provided
with waved ribs. The depth of these grooves must not exceed 0.005 inch. The width of the surface with the waved ribs is left to the decision of the firm and inspector. The method of fixing the driving bands is left to the discretion of the firm, the only requirement being that the order must be manufactured by the same methods as used for the manufacture of test consignment, provided that the firing trial of that consignment was satisfactory. The number of shrapnels supplied by the firm for this firing and for the inspection of the driving bands is mentioned in Clause 2. If the firm is proposing to alter the method of
204
the fixing of the driving bands, it must submit, at its own expense, a test consignment of 25 shrapnels for firing
trials.
During the manufacture of the order for shrapnels the

if he thinks it necessary, submitted to him, not more than from each consignment 1 per cent of the projectiles for the removal of their driving bands, in order to ascertain how close they are to the shrapnel bodies. The inspector also has the right to demand an accuracy trial with some of the above-mentioned shrapnel, but in this case he must give detailed reasons for doing so. If the results of this firing are unsatisfactory, the military authorities have the right to demand the replacement of driving bands on the whole order. Clause 11. Secondary Inspection of Shrapnel Bodies The shrapnels ane subafter the Firing of Driving Bands. mitted for the secondary inspection with fixed driving
inspector has the right to choose,
bands, finished sockets, steel diaphragms in place, central tubes and socket nut, but without socket fixing screws, as The central bosses on the base well as fuse fixing screws. must be cut away in cases where the shrapnels were submitted with them for the first inspection. The powder chamber, lower portion of steel diaphragms, and inner surface of central tube must be covered with durable varnish. During this inspection special care must be taken to ascertain the proper fixing of the driving band. The proper fixing of the driving bands is ascertained by (1) sounding them with small hammers, and (2) removal of driving bands from some shrapnels, preferably those rejected. The driving bands when being sounded with hammer must not make any jarring sound. The jarring sound is only allowed at the joint of the driving band, for not more than one-tenth of its length; the bands not answering to these conditions must be replaced by new ones. The driving bands, after being removed from the shrapnel, must have impressions of the waved grooves on the bottom of the groove; the inside surface must not show the pink color of the unused copper, but must be smooth and give a slight
reflection.
205
When removing the driving band, special attention must be paid to the fact that the bands fit properly into the sides of the groove, and that they are close to the shrapnel In the case of copper strips being too wide, the bodies. shrapnel bodies show cracks, sometimes on account of the method of fixing and sometimes on account of too high a These cracks can be ascertained by sounding the pressure. shrapnels with a hammer the cracked shrapnels will make a dull sound. Such shrapnels must be rejected.
;
During secondary inspection, the inspector must ascertain the following facts 1. If the powder chamber, lower surface of steel dia:
phragms, and inner surface of the central tube are varif steel diaphragms fit properly in the corresponding of the shrapnel bodies steel diaphragms must bear on place the lower surface of the shoulder and must be in close contact with the inside surface of the shrapnel bodies. Special care must be taken with reference to the tight fitting of
nished
; ;
the steel diaphragms. 2. The base of shrapnel bodies must be absolutely smooth; attention must be paid to the presence of rough surfaces; black spots, cracks, or any damages, which are not allowed on the site of the central boss ; shrapnel bodies with such defects are not allowed. The final finishing of the driving band may be done after the shrapnels are nickel-plated, at the discretion of the
inspector.
Clause
12.
Inspection
of
Steel
Diaphragms.
Dia-
phragms are made from steel stampings under the hammer or press. The metal, with reference to the mechanical qualities, must meet the requirements set forth for the shrapnel bodies (see Clause 3). The holes for the central tubes must be drilled; these holes must be made with a
shoulder for the central tube the outer surface of the diaphragm, as well as the shoulder of the hole for the central The diaphragms must tube, must be accurately machined. not show any cracks or other defects. The test of the metal for the diaphragms consists of hammering them by the dropping of a weight from a certain
;
206
height.
The number of blows which the diaphragms can stand without any cracks must be ascertained by the inspector during the manufacture of the test consignment of In addition to this, the quality of the metal shrapnels. must be ascertained by the Brinell test. During firing, the diaphragms must not show any dents; this fact must be ascertained on some shrapnels recovered after the firing. The manufacturer must supply the inspector with ten diaphragms for the mechanical tests of material. These diaphragms will be chosen by the inspector from the total number of diaphragms for the whole consignment. For the hammering tests, not more than one per cent of the total diaphragms must be chosen, and the Brinell test must be carried out on not less than one per cent of the whole number of diaphragms. In the case of satisfactory results, the
whole consignment is accepted; otherwise, additional tests on two per cent of the diaphragms must be carried out, and in the case of unsatisfactory results, even on one diaphragm, the whole consignment will be rejected. Diaphragms must be submitted for inspection in quantities not less than 200.
The lower surface

inspection.
of the
diaphragm must be varnished after
In the case of the manufacturer being allowed to make shrapnels without submission to test consignment, as per Clause 3, the inspector must test the diaphragms as usual. Clause 13. Inspection of Central Tube. The central tubes must be made of steel, must not show any cracks, must be properly welded, and must be of similar thickness on the whole length. For the purpose of ascertaining the mechanical qualities of the metal used for the central tubes, small cylinders inch in length (li/ times the diameter 2 of the tube) must be cut from some of the tubes which have been previously properly measured; these cylinders must be subjected to a compression test under the press. The minimum resistance shown by these cylinders under compression, before the beginning of buckling, must be not The outer as well as less than 14.45 tons per square inch. the inner surfaces of tubes must be smooth and their ends must be cut perpendicular to their axes. The length of the
207
tube is ascertained during the assembling of the shrapnel. In the assembled shrapnel, the upper end of the central tube must be inside of the countersunk hole provided for in the socket nut. Sockets must be Clause 14. Inspection of Sockets.
manufactured from steel. The breaking strength of steel used for sockets must be of about 60 kilograms per square millimeter (38.1 tons per square inch), with an elongation not less than 16 per cent (the distance between marks being 2 inches). Sockets are submitted for inspection in quantities of not less than 100; they must be tapped with thread on the inside as well as on the outside surfaces; the conical portion of the surface must be machined; the upper surface must be machined, but this machining may be left rough at this stage; those parts of the sockets by which they are fixed to the shrapnel bodies must be accu-
The rately machined; the sockets must be accurately cut. sockets must be provided with two holes, one for filling with
and another one for the escape of gases. If sockets are stamped, the outer surface of the stem can be left without machining, but it must be very smooth. The upper surface of the sockets may be submitted to the inspector without being finish-machined. The sockets must not show any signs of cracks, fissures or any rough surface. Chipping in the thread of the hole or on the conical fuse seat may be allowed, but of a very slight nature. To ascertain the mechanical qualities of the metal used for sockets, the inspector has the right to carry out the tests on one per cent of the sockets from each consignment. For this purpose, rings must be cut from the upper portion of the sockets, and these rings are subjected to the hammering test by a weight dropped from a certain height. In addition, the sockets must be tested with the Brinell test, and for this purpose not less than 1 per cent of the sockets must be used. Clause 15. Inspection of Brass Socket Nuts. The socket nuts must be cast of an alloy consisting of 2 parts
resin,
of copper and 1 part of zinc, taken by weight. The socket nuts are submitted to the inspector after being finally ma-
208
chined, threaded, with finished upper and lower surfaces, with central hole made to the drawing, and with slot for the Socket nuts must not show any defects. key. Bullets Clause 16. Bullets and Smoke Compositions. must be of a true spherical shape; they must be cast of an
alloy consisting of 4 parts of lead and 1 part of antimony, taken by weight sprues must be cut off, and the surface of the bullets must be smooth. The diameter of the bullets
;
0.5 inch; mean weight, 0.376 ounce. Separate bullets differ from the mean weight, but they must not be less may
is
Under must not show any cracks. slight hammering the bullets The force of the blow must be decided by the inspector, the
than 0.373 ounce, and not more than 0.381 ounce.
reason for this test being to ascertain if the bullets can be used in shrapnels where they are slightly compressed, as after this pressure they must not show any cracks. Shrapnel must contain from about 256 to 265 bullets. The bullets must be placed in proper layers, and each layer must be slightly pressed in, but after this .pressure bullets must not be deformed to any noticeable extent, except those in the bottom layer. Layers consist of 17 or 18 bullets, except the top layers, which have about 20 bullets each. The five bottom layers of bullets must be covered with smoke composition made of metallic antimony and magnesium in the following proportions, by weight 55 parts of antimony and 45 parts of magnesium; 0.75 ounce of smoke composition must be put in each shrapnel. This composition must be put in after the first five layers of bullets are in place, and the shrapnel must be shaken in order to settle the powder. The smoke composition must ignite very quickly. The inspector must see that the composition is made from the magnesium and antimony as stated above. With bullets in place, and with socket in proper position, the shell must be filled with melted resin. Clause 17. The Third Inspection of Shrapnels and The shrapnels for the third Checking of Their Weight. inspection are submitted after being fully assembled and charged with the bullets and smoke composition, and after being filled with resin; the holes in the sockets used for
:

filling
209
with resin and for the escape of gases must be stopped with threaded steel plugs. These plugs must be riveted over and polished flush with the surface of the socket. During the third inspection, the shrapnel is gaged with special gages to check shape the hole for the fuse is tested by a special screw gage; copper driving bands must be inspected and gaged. After this inspection the shrapnels are weighed. The shells which show the ends of the driving bands not completely touching each other, may be accepted if the distance between them is very small. The outer surface of the socket must be finish-machined and must be smooth and perpendicular to the center line of the fuse socket. The socket must be fixed by means of steel screws, the outer ends of which must be cut flush with the surface of the shrapnel, and polished over.
;
During this inspection, the inspector must ascertain that the head portion of the shrapnels does not show any cracks due to the drilling and tapping of the holes for the screws. The head of the shrapnel must be provided with a tapped The head of this screw hole for the fuse securing screw. must be flush with the shrapnel bodies. The upper end of the central tube must fill completely the countersunk part
provided for
The
steel
it in the socket nut, if it is in proper position. gage rod dropped into the opening of the central
tube must reach the base of the shrapnel. To ascertain the proper assembling of the inner part of the shrapnels, the inspector has the right to demand dismantling of not more than 0.5 per cent of the shrapnels submitted. While inspecting the dismantled shrapnels, the inspector must ascertain the following points 1. If the thread of fixing screws for socket and fuse, as well as the threads in holes for them, are cleanly cut, and if the length of these screws is sufficient. If the socket remains steady when screwed into the 2. shrapnel bodies, before being fixed with screws. 3. If the end of the central tube remains clean and the central tube itself is not damaged by the bullets. 4. If the bullets are covered with resin and if the shrapnels are filled with smoke composition.
:
210
If the number of bullets is correct, and also that they 5. are not appreciably damaged after pressing. If the steel diaphragm is in the right position in the 6.
shrapnel. After the third inspection the shrapnels must be weighed the normal weight of the assembled shrapnels, without zinc
;
1.053 ounce. All plugs, must be 13 pounds 7.33 ounces shrapnels passed by the inspector must be stamped on the
base.
All Clause 18. Nickel-plating, Varnishing and Oiling. the outside surfaces of the shrapnel with the exception of the copper driving bands must be nickel-plated and varnished. This nickel-plating and varnishing must be duraThe manufacturer must take steps to prevent the ble. passage of the liquid inside of the shrapnels during nickelThe shrapnels must be inspected by the manuplating. facturer after being nickel-plated so as to ascertain that no liquid passed inside the powder chamber, and, if necThe shrapnels must essary, the chamber must be cleaned. be submitted for final inspection after being nickel-plated and varnished. The socket in the front portion of the shrapnel must be oiled and covered with the zinc plug shown in Fig. 1; the socket must be fitted with fixing screws for the fuse; the screws must be oiled with naphtha grease. The copper driving bands must be gaged during this inspection. While inspecting the shrapnels, the inspector must see to the follow-
ing points:
1. That the driving bands are not damaged; shrapnels with damaged bands must be returned to the works for new
bands.
2. That the nickel-plating of the shrapnels is sound and that the nickel-plated surfaces do not show any signs of
rust.
That the fixing screw for the fuse is properly cut the top of this screw, when screwed completely down, must The slightly protrude over the surface of the shrapnel. threads must be Whitworth, 24 threads per inch. A plug and ring gage must be provided for gaging this thread.
3.
;

4. 5.
211
That the socket is free from rust. That the powder chamber, as well as the inside of the
fit
central tube, is clean. The zinc plug must
properly to the upper surface of
The copper driving bands must be oiled with naphtha grease to prevent them from corroding. The shrapnel, before shipping from the works, must be packed The details of the packing is left in strong wooden boxes.
the fuse socket.
to the discretion of the manufacturer, provided that
it
is
approved by the inspector. While packing, care must be taken to place driving bands in guards to prevent their being damaged by knocks from the outside, or from rattling one against the other, or against the packing during transport.
The number
of shrapnels packed in one
box must not
exceed, in weight (box included), 253 pounds. When shipping the manufactured shrapnels
from the
works, two spare fuse fixing screws must be put in every box. Spare zinc plugs, 5 per cent of the total number supplied, must be delivered together with order and packed in separate wooden boxes, 50 in each box. The works must deliver the Clause 19. Firing Tests.
required
number of shrapnels to the place where they will The proof by firing will be carried out with a 3-inch quick-firing gun with a charge of smokeless powder, and with chamber pressure of 2400 atmospheres (15.75
be. tested.
tons per square inch).
The recovery proof must be carried out without bursting charge, but the shrapnels must be fitted with time fuses. When time fuses are not available, the proof must be carried out with steel or brass dummy fuses similar to those
used for accuracy trials. These dummy fuses must be supEvery shrapnel must be plied at the expense of the firm. weighed and the weights taken down. The time fuse must be set a distance of from 1400 to 1635 yards. It must be noticed whether or not the fuse exTo obtain the best conditions for observation, plodes. the firing must take place with sight set up 10 divisions higher than is required by the range. Up to one-third of
212
the shrapnels proved for recovery must be fired with bursting charge, so as to ascertain that they are properly assembled. The fuse socket in the last mentioned cases must be
plugged with
dummy
fuses.
at such a range as to enable the recovery of the shrapnels for inspection and measuring of same all shrapnels, before firing, must be measured on their cylindrical portion and the accuracy of the base must be ascertained, in order to facilitate notice being taken with reference to the bulging of the bodies and bases of the shrapnels. The diameters of the cylindrical portion must be taken in sections two inches apart. Marks must be made on the copper driving bands and on the cylindrical part of the shrapnel bodies adjacent, to facilitate notice being taken of the displacement of the driving band, if such takes
firing
;
The
must be carried out
place.
For accuracy trials, shrapnels without time fuse must be used, and special steel or brass dummy fuses must be screwed in; the outline and weight of this dummy must be similar to that of the fuse, and the weight of the shrapnel with such dummy must be 14 pounds 5.33 ounces. These dummy fuses must be made by the manufacturer at his exThe accuracy trials must be carried out by aiming pense. the gun at a vertical target at a range of 2335 yards. After the firing trial for recovery and for accuracy, the maximum possible number of shrapnels must be recovered and inspected, as to any marks from the rifling on the shrapnel bodies, any dents or damages on bases or heads, any displacement of the driving bands or any shrapnels with broken off bases. To ascertain the accuracy of fitting of the steel diaphragms, and the condition of the bullets, two shrapnels .must be dismantled. In addition, all those shrapnels which have displaced central tubes must be dismantled. The shrapnels must be measured on their diameter in order to ascertain the deformations. A pit test must also be carried out. The shrapnels must be fully loaded for the pit test and must be fitted with ordinary zinc plugs screwed into the fuse sockets.
CHAPTER
VIII
IN-
SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE MANUFACTURE AND SPECTION OF THE COMBINATION FUSE FOR RUSSIAN 3-INCH SHRAPNEL SHELLS
The following
specifications contain all the essential information relating to the Russian aluminum 22-second com-
bination or double-acting fuse for shrapnel shells used in 3-inch quick-firing field and mountain guns, as given in the official specifications. This chapter, therefore, contains a complete description of every part used in the fuse, together with complete details relating to the manufacture,
inspection,
and
tests.
Component
Parts of Fuse.
The fuse
consists of over
thirty separate parts, the names of each of which are specified in the table below, together with their weights.
FUSE PART
Weight
In Ounces. Avoirdupois
Stem (with cloth) Chamber bushing with needle
3.7166
for percussion detonator
cap (without powder) Bushing with needle for time detonator cap Plug (brass) in the flange of the stem Upper time ring (complete with powder; for filling in both upper and lower time ring 0.24075 ounce avoirdupois of powder (fuse) are required; for 1-000 fuses, the following quantities of fuse powder are
required:
for pressing into the time rings, approximately 16.25 pounds avoirdupois; for powder pellets in the vents of the lower time ring, approximately 3.912 ounces avoirdupois) with powder and parch-
0.1971 0.0331 0.0150
ment Lower time ring

ring)
1.1586 1.1496 3.6278 0.0361 0.5492 0.2632
(see note in parenthesis on upper time with powder, asbestos, pins, and tin disk
Nut
Two
set-screws for nut Tightening ring (split) Time detonator (assembled) Time detonator parts:
Pellet
Rod
Spiral brass spring
Cap
Safety bushing for the time detonator (the bushing for the time detonator for mountain guns weighs 0.0677 ounce avoirdupois)
213
0.1429 0.1023 0.0030 0.0150
0.1128
214
RUSSIAN COMBINATION FUSE

0.4514 0.3671 0.0451 0.0226 0.0166 0.0481 0.1655 0.5597 0.5718 0.1520
Percussion detonator (assembled) Percussion detonator parts:

Pellet
Brass bushing Lead disk (washer on flange)
Cap
Safety arrangement for percussion detonator: Brass safety stirrup with brass control spring Steel spiral spring Lock bushing for the safety stirrup for percussion detonator
Base plug with counter safety lug and brass disk Lead disk Powder for the chamber bushing and transmitting duct of stem Mean weight of complete and ready-for-firing fuse for 3-inch field gun Mean weight of complete and ready-for-firing fuse for 3-inch mountain gun
0.0572
12.8628 12.8177
The weights
of the additional parts not included in 1.0533 0.1053 0.0196
above list are: Tin protecting cover with tape Copper wire for removing the cover
Shell grease for lubricating grooves of stem
cast of
The stem is to be aluminum (or an alloy of aluminum and copper) and pressed. The top of the stem is to be turned on the
Design and Construction of Stem.
outside into three cylindrical shoulders, the upper one being threaded for receiving the nut; on the surface of the
two upper shoulders,
parallel to the axis of the stem, three are milled. The base of the stem top guiding grooves serves as a turning axis for the lower time ring. The interior of the top of the stem is to be bored out to form three cylindrical chambers, the lower of which is threaded to receive the brass bushing with the conical steel needle; the latter is lacquered and inserted into the bushing from the bottom, its head being riveted. To prevent the un-
screwing of the bushing, the latter is nipped in two places. A vent is drilled through the wall at the top of the stem. The upper face of the flange of the stem has a rim on its circumference, and on a radius located in a vertical plane with the vent of the stem top, a transmitting duct is drilled, reaching from the lateral surface of the flange to the powder chamber of the fuse the upper face of the flange communicates with this duct through an ignition hole pasted
;
215
onto the top with a muslin disk. The transmitting duct (covered with a neutral varnish) is filled, in the assembled fuse, with grain powder (for 100 fuses, about 3.84 pounds avoirdupois of unpolished rifle powder is required) and On the lateral surface of the closed with a brass plug. two annular grooves are milled out, the lower of flange which has four recesses for staking in the tin cover. On the lower face of the flange (two marks shall be placed on this face, one giving the last two digits of the year of manufacture of the fuses, and the other the number of the control consignment of the same year) at the ends of a diameter, two slanting cuts are milled for the wrench which screws the fuse into the shrapnel. On the same lateral surface a conical mark is cut, colored red, for the setting of the graduations of the fuse; on the top face of the flange a cloth washer is pasted, with a hole punched in The cloth is pasted with a special it over the ignition hole. thick varnish which is also used for pasting the twilled tape to the cover. The varnish consists of white resin, shellac and turpentine soluble in alcohol. Through the lateral surface of the flange a hole is drilled, leading to the lower face of the flange and intended for fastening the copper wire for tearing off the cover. The tail of the stem is shaped with a smooth cone on the top and a threaded cylinder at the bottom; the interior of the tail is to be bored out to form three cylindrical chambers, the upper and lower of which are threaded to receive the chamber and the base plugs, and the smooth, middle one, is intended for the percussion arrangement.
,
The chamber bushing (brass) bottom for transmitting the flame into the interior of the shrapnel shell, and one central hole into which the varnished steel needle is screwed from the top. The lower face of the bottom of the bushing is recessed for locating the compressed brass counter spring of the percusThe inside surface of the bushing is sion safety stirrup. covered with neutral varnish, and, before filling it with powder, a muslin and wax paper disk are deposited at the bottom. The powder in the bushing is compressed slightly,
has four holes in
its
The Chamber Bushing.
216
to prevent its scattering in handling, before screwing the bushings in their places. The screwed-in bushing is nipped
its wall is drilled through the transmitting before charging the latter, for exposing the powder duct, in the bushing. Both time rings are cast from an The Time Rings. aluminum-copper alloy (copper from 2!/2 to 3 per cent) and stamped in a die; on the under side of each ring a groove with an intervening bridge and semi-circular arch is formed by first stamping it in a die and then milling it. The grooves are coated on the inside with Ossovetski's neutral varnish, and fuse powder pressed into them. The portions filled with powder are then turned off and a thin, parchment washer pasted on their under surface with a neutral varnish. The parchment of each time ring is punctured over the transmitting hole, to hasten the transmission of the flame in
in
two places and
grape-shot firing. The upper time ring is turned on the inside to form two cones connected by a circular section; the lower cone also terminates into a circular section having three protruding lugs fitting into the three slots of the stem top, thus allowing the time ring to slide vertically only along the axis of the fuse. On the upper side of the time ring an annular groove is to be turned for the reception of a soaked leather washer. From the lower cone of the time ring an oblique hole is to be bored, near one end of the bridge (left end in looking at the lower end of the time ring) communicating with the transmitting hole drilled through the composition groove. Through this oblique hole the composition is ignited from the time detonator cap of the fuse, assisted by the powdei preparation pasted by means of alcohol varnish on the side wall of the hole next to the bridge. From the circular section-connecting both cones of the time ring to the under side of the same, four gas escape holes are provided, facilitating the escape of the gases from the burning lower time com
position.
turned on the inside, providing a on the base of the stem top and turning freely around same. At one end of the
is
The lower time ring
slight cylindrical shoulder fitting
217
intervening bridge (opposite the one in the upper ring) a transmitting hole is drilled through the bottom of the composition groove of the time ring, transmitting the flame from the upper to the lower composition. To insure the ignition of the composition, a powder pellet with a central hole is inserted into the transmitting hole. From this transmitting hole, a gas escape hole, located on a radius of the time ring is provided, which at its base has a bursting
charge of powder (varnished) pressed into it, plugged up with asbestos, and covered with a foil ring pasted with varnish. This hole facilitates the escape of gases from the burning composition of the lower time ring. The asbestos plug prevents the possibility of a premature ignition of the lower composition from the upper one, and the powder charge is intended for an immediate clearing of the plugging at the gas escape hole soon after the ignition of the lower composition through the transmitting hole. The lateral surface of the lower time ring is provided with
:
1.
Four pairs of pins inserted
into corresponding holes
for the setting of the fuse by hand. 2. Two holes for a wrench, if same should be required for setting the fuses.
Graduation from 10 to 130. Separate graduation marked with the digit "5." 5. One notch marked in red and one notch marked in black with letters as directed by the contracting government. The upper side of the lower time ring is covered with a cloth washer having an opening opposite the transmitting
3.
4.
hole.
The Brass Nut. From the outside, the nut presents a rounded surface terminating into an umbrella. Inside the nut a thread is cut for screwing onto the top of the stem the threaded hole opens into an oval cylindrical cavity communicating with the outside atmosphere by means of four openings in the neck of the umbrella. The edges of these four openings are milled out on a side opposite to the direc;
tion of the rotation of the shell to facilitate the escape of gases. At the bottom of the nut an arch-like annular recess
218
is
milled out for the accumulation of gases from the burning compositions of the time rings, whence they escape into the above-mentioned oval cylindrical cavity through four inclined channels, and then out of the fuse through the openings in the neck of the umbrella. The nut is provided with
two brass screws for securing it in place, after being screwed home on the top of the stem. The upper percussion Upper Percussion Arrangement. consists of a brass time pellet and safety ferarrangement rule the time detonating cap is inserted into the pellet and is held in place by means of a brass rod and brass spiral spring wound on the head of the latter. The safety ferrule
;
a hollow cylinder with a side slot, resting on the shoulder between the upper and lower chambers of the stem top. In its outside appearance the time pellet represents a cylinder of two different diameters connected with a conical slope; with the latter, the pellet resting on the conical enlargement of the ferrule. The lower cylindrical part of the pellet slides into the inside of the ferrule, and the upper, together with the projecting part of the rod, is located above the top of the stem in the cavity of the nut leaning with its steel spring against the arch of the cavity. The rod is kept firmly in place, being staked in on the circumference of the joint in two places. On the top of the stem, embracing the middle smooth cylindrical portion, the brass conical tightening ring is put on, fitting into the conical seat of the upper time ring. The ring is provided with a pin, which is guided in its movements by one of the three grooves in the top of the stem, opposite the vent. In order not to cover up the vent in the stem top, a longitudinal slot is cut in the ring opposite the former; the eight other grooves on the outside of the ring facilitate the tightening of the ring. Lower Percussion Arrangement. The lower percussion arrangement is located in the tail of the stem between the chamber and the base bushing and consists of a percussion pellet, lock bushing, brass safety stirrup with counter spring, steel spiral spring, and lead washer. The brass percussion pellet, turned all over, is provided with 1. Bottom
is
:
219
shoulder resting on lead washer in base plug; the top of turned off and the strips of the counter catch hold onto it. 2. Cylindrical shoulder with safety
this shoulder is
lower turn of steel spiral spring embracing same and guiding the compression of the spring when the lock bushing 3. Lead washer with rectangular openis settling down. coated with varnish, and placed on the upper face of ing, the shoulder. 4. Parallel faces along which are placed the leaves of the safety stirrup. On the upper part of the two opposite faces of the percussion pellet transverse cuts are milled out into which special tongues of the leaves of the safety stirrup fit. The safety stirrup with the counter spring soldered to it has four leaves, two of which (opposite ones) are bent in the middle outwardly and two of which are straight, with only a slight outward bend at their ends; the latter leaves have tongues for fitting into
the cuts of the pellets, as shown in Fig. 4, Chapter I. The lock bushing is a hollow brass cylinder, the outer upper portion of which is rounded off and made wider than the lower one; the interior is bored out cylindrically and then widened into a cone, which catches the straight leaves of the safety stirrup when the lock bushing is settling down, thus preventing the latter from moving upwards. The
steel spiral spring in conjunction with the bent leaves of the stirrup hold the lock bushing over the percussion pellet. The percussion cap is kept in place by means of a brass bushing which is staked in from below in two places. Base Plug. The base plug, which is made of brass, has an annular groove formed at the bottom near the wall, which serves for fastening the counter safety lugs made of two strips of copper. At one end, the lugs are inserted in the groove (at the opposite ends of a diameter), and at
jammed; with their other ends the lugs catch onto the shoulder of the bottom flange of the percussion pellet, inserted in the base plug together with the lead washer. The base plug has a flat bottom with a
central opening covered with a brass disk ; in order not to leave any space between this disk and its seat, the former is covered with varnish from below; two other holes at
this place the metal is
220
the bottom of the bushing, not drilled through, serve for the insertion of a wrench. These tests Testing Fuses and Their Component Parts. are carried out as follows
:
stirrups and bushings (time and percussion) are divided into lots of 500 each. Five per cent of each lot shall be tested for bending in a hydraulic testing
1.
The brass safety
The resisting force of the percussion safety stirpress. rups must be within the limits of 58.68 to 85.77 pounds avoirdupois, that of the brass counter springs between 2.71 to 3.16 pounds avoirdupois, and that of the time safety (For bushing between 72.23 to 99.31 pounds avoirdupois.
fuses for mountain artillery, from 40.63 to 54.17 pounds All the time safety bushings shall also be avoirdupois.) on the same press to a compression test of 72.23 subjected pounds (for fuses for mountain guns, 45.14 pounds avoir-
dupois), and only those which have stood this test are finally considered suitable for the assembly of the fuses.
2.
The
steel spiral springs shall
have no more than
2%
and the upper and lower one must lie in a horizontal plane and approach the nearest turn. In compressing the springs to 0.33 inch, the springs must withstand a pressure of from 20.76 to 47.08 pounds avoirdupois, and after removing the compressive load must resume the dimensions within
turns,
the given limits. 3. One-quarter per cent of the completely assembled percussion arrangement must be tested for determining the correctness of the locking of the lock bushing with the safety stirrup, with the former in its settling down position. 4. The counter safety lugs with the base plugs are made into lots of 500 each; 5 per cent of each lot, with the up inserted percussion arrangement held in place by bending the lugs on the shoulder of the lower flange, are tested under load for unbending the catches of the counter safety At a load of from 3.61 to 5.42 pounds avoirdupois, lugs. the lugs must release the pellet. The percussion and time safety bushings and stirrups should be numbered with the number of the lot, in the order of their manufacture. In order to secure easy turning of the lower time 5.
221
ring by hand, in setting the fuse, the pressure on the nut in screwing it home should be determined by readings of an automatic control wrench and should be between 6.32 and
8.12 pounds avoirdupois.
6. .For testing the degree of uniformity of the fuses, they are divided into lots of not more than 500 each. The testing for the full burning time of the fuse is to take place on a special apparatus and shall.be determined by a stopwatch; the mean arithmetical difference from the mean time of burning shall be determined from six tested fuses and shall not exceed 0.13 second. If a greater difference is obtained, nine more fuses shall be burned and the mean If difference determined from fifteen separate readings. the result is more than 0.13 second, ten more fuses shall be burned and the mean difference determined from all the twenty-five fuses. If a lot does not fulfill the required test, all the time rings shall be rejected and the powder in same
burned
7.
out.
In order to determine whether all the component parts of a fuse are properly assembled and kept firmly in place without moving, each fuse is shaken by hand and weighed; if the smallest weight of a fuse is not less than 12.862 ounces avoirdupois (for a mountain fuse, not less than 12.81 ounces avoirdupois) and no displacement of any of its component parts ascertained, the fuse is set on "grape-shot" and provided with a protective tin cover; otherwise the fuse shall be taken apart to determine whether all the parts are inserted in the fuse.
8.
The percussion and time detonator caps
shall
be
tested for their sensitiveness to ignition by being thrown from a height of two feet for the former, and 1.5 feet for
the latter, on the same apparatus as caps for other fuses. For testing the percussion caps, the lower percussion arrangement is set, i. e., the lock bushing is set until locked with the percussion pellet by means of the leaves of the
safety stirrup, and then carefully thrust onto the needle of the tail of the stem. For testing the time detonator caps, the time pellet is first inserted into the safety bushing; this is done in order
222
to increase the

weight of the
pellet, as its
own weight
is
within the safety bushing, the chamstem (the middle one) is bored out, and the percussion pellet is carefully thrust onto the needle. In testing the percussion detonator caps, the tail of the stem is screwed into the end sleeve of the rod of the testing apparatus, and in testing the time detonator caps the top of the stem is treated in the same manner; in the latter test, the time rings are first put on the flange of the stem. For testing the caps delivered to the works manufacturing the fuses in hermetically sealed boxes (1500 percussion and 2500 time detonator caps in each lot), i/2 Per cent of the percussion caps and 1 per cent of the time caps are The caps are regarded as satisselected for this purpose. factory if, in testing the percussion caps, there will not be more than 1 per cent of cases missing fire or failing to knock out the brass disk from the base plug in testing the time caps the number of cases of non-ignition of the time rings shall not exceed Va per cent. The ignited percussion caps must burn the muslin and paper disks placed at the bottom of the chamber bushing and ignite its powder. 9. Out of a control consignment of 25,000 fuses, 25 shall be selected for shaking tests on a testing machine during IVa hour (10 fuses will be shaken in a horizontal position and 15 in a vertical), in order to determine the serviceability of the fuses under the most unfavorable conditions which can be encountered in transporting the shells. The tin cap Equipment of Fuses with Protective Covers. the fuse is pressed into both grooves on the lateral covering surface of the flange of the stem opposite the holes in the lower groove the cover is staked in for waterproofing the fuse, the grooves should be filled with grease (consisting of 58 Va parts of beeswax, 291/2 parts of naphtha grease, and 12 parts of white resin). To conveniently throw off the cover, a copper wire, stranded of four separate thin wires to preserve its flexibility, is inserted in the upper groove before putting on the cover. One end of the wire is slip;
;
;
too small and would the rod of the testing insert the time pellet ber in the top of the
necessitate a considerable lifting of apparatus. In order to conveniently
223
ped through the opening in the flange and fastened at the bottom; the wire then runs around almost the whole circumference of the groove, is bent in a right angle in the direction of the markings on the flange to the top of the cover, where it is knotted and kept in place by a protruding button pressed out of the cover. A piece of twilled tape is fastened to the wire, which tape, in turn, is pasted to the
body of the cover. Each fuse with cover, after being Boxing of Fuses. the varnish of the tape being found perfectly examined and dry, is carefully wrapped in wrapping paper; 15 fuses are placed in a zinc box padded at the bottom with perfectly dry felt, and the spaces between the fuses filled in with felt or cloth cuttings. The fuses are covered with felt padding and the cover is soldered to the box. A paper ticket, pasted on the top of the box, should contain the following inforThe number of the box in the order of manufacmation
:
ture of the fuses in the current year, the year of their manufacture, the name of the fuses and the quantity per box, the number of the control consignment and of the daily output, the time of pressing in the composition, and the time of the ignition test. The dimensions of the box are:
length, 12.15 to 12.20 inches, width, 7.25 to 7.30 inches, and height, 3.11 to 3.16 inches. Four zinc boxes are put into a
wooden box. The following information should be given on the tag pasted on the lower side of the wooden box cover: The number of the box in the order of their manufacture in the
current year, the year of the manufacture of the fuses, the kind of fuses, and the quantity in the box. On the top of the box a stenciled inscription should be made giving the number of the box, the quantity and kind of fuses, and the year of their manufacture. On the side of the box the number of the control consignment and the year of manufacture should be marked. On boxes containing fuses with alloy time rings, the number of the box and the year of manufacture on the cover of the box, as well as the number of the lot and the year of manufacture on the side of the box, should be colored red. The weight of one zinc box con-
224
taining fifteen fuses should be approximately 16.7 pounds avoirdupois, and the weight of one wooden box containing
four zinc boxes be approximately 90.3 pounds avoirdupois.

Instructions for Conducting Firing Tests.
official
1.
The
follow-
ing instructions for conducting firing tests are given in the

specifications:
For
firing tests, fifty-five fuses should be tested out
of a lot of 25,000 fuses or less. 2. The fuses are to be subjected to the following firing Field fuses will tests, using cast-iron experimental shells
:
be fired from a 3-inch quick-firing field gun at a muzzle velocity of 1930 feet per second and mean pressure of not more than 2400 atmospheres (35,500 pounds per square inch), and a maximum pressure of not more than 2550 Fuses from atmospheres (37,500 pounds per square inch) a 3-inch quick-firing mountain gun, model 1904, are fired at a muzzle velocity of 950 feet per second and a mean pressure of about 1250 atmospheres (18,400 pounds per square inch) or from a 3-inch quick-firing gun, model 1909, at a muzzle velocity of 1250 feet per second and mean pressure of approximately 1700 atmospheres (25,000 pounds per square
. ,
inch).
25 fuses should be tested by firing for percussion (a) action at a distance of about 4900 feet.
(b)
25 fuses should be tested for firing for time action

,
by setting the fuse at 52 (mountain guns at 66) or at any other graduation depending on the atmospheric conditions
of the day, in order to obtain a
7000
feet, whereby the
mean bursting distance of mean height of the bursting should
amount
to approximately 0.012 of the distance.
5 fuses should be tested for "grape shot" action (c) without removing the protecting cover.
Mountain fuses are also tested with 25 shots for (d) time action from a counter-storming gun at a distance of 3500 feet and a mean pressure of approximately 1100 atmospheres (16,200 pounds per square inch). 3. A lot of fuses is considered satisfactory if: In firing for percussion action not more than 2 fail(a) ures shall take place, whereby the bursting on ricocheting at
225
the second or further falls is considered as a failure. In firing with the fuse set at 52 or at any other (b) graduation, depending on the atmospheric conditions of the day, in order to obtain a mean exploding distance of 7000 feet, not more than one failure shall result, and the probable deflection determined from not less than 20 shots will not exceed 84 feet. In case no failures should occur, it is permissible in figuring the probable deflection not to take
into consideration one of the shots deflected not
more than 420 feet from the mean point of explosion on the smaller side, or one deflected on the larger side.
In firing "grape shot," the. mean point of explosion (c) shall not be farther than 42 feet, and any individual explo-
sion not farther than 140 feet.
In firing for time and percussion action not a single (d) premature explosion shall take place. 4. A lot which did not satisfy these conditions is accepted for a second test, if at the first test the following
conditions prevailed
(a)
:
Not more than 3
failures
were obtained
in firing for
percussion action. (b) In firing for time action not more than two failures took place, and the probable deflection did not exceed 98
feet.
(c) In testing for "grape shot" action not more than one failure took place, the mean point of bursting being not farther than 56 feet and any individual explosion not more
than 175
feet.
(d) In firing for time and percussion action not a single premature explosion took place. 5. A lot which failed in the first test, but which satisfied the requirements of Paragraph 4 shall be tested over again, according to Paragraph 3, on that point only in which the lot failed in testing. 6. In order to be accepted for service, a lot must, at the second test, give such results that the percentage of failures on time and percussion action obtained at the first and second firing shall not exceed in its entirety the percentage which was determined in Paragraph 3 for corre-
226
tests. The probable deflections and mean distances of explosion obtained at the second test for time action, and in testing for 'grape shot" action must satisfy respectively the requirements as laid down in Paragraph 3. 7. lot which did not satisfy both tests will not be sub-
spending
'
jected to any more tests, and any further action will depend upon the military authorities.
Machinery
Fig.
1.
Russian
Combination Time and

(Vickers Type)
Percussion
Fuse
In setting the fuses it is Action of Fuses at Firing. necessary to bear in mind that each of the 130 graduations of the fuse corresponds to approximately 140 feet (in fuses
feet) in the
for mountain artillery of the Russian 1904 model to 104 change of the firing distance, the same as the graduations on the sight of the gun. In firing, the time pellet passes through the safety bushing, expanding the latter,
and falling with the cap on the needle.
The detonator
227
cap ignites the composition of the copper time ring through the vent in stem top and the hole in upper time ring. When the fuse is set on "percussion", the transmitting opening of the lower time ring and the ignition of the flange of the stem are located opposite the intervening bridges, and the burning of the upper time composition is not transmitted into the chamber of the fuse. In such a case the shrapnel continues its movement until striking an
H 0.866 L 0.858 f7-r--f| u
,H 0.183
0.170,
T HDS. PER INCH
R. H.
H O.SJ16 L 0.512
B 0.146 L0.13
U0.14L0.134
OAH
>JH4
=$'
2JTHDS. PER INCH

PER INCH
R. H'
^T^ T^DS.
R. H.
BODY ALUMINUM
HOLES
2.36
DIA.
X 0.05
DEEP
L2.34
Machinery
Fig.
2.
Body
of
Russian Combination Time and Percussion (Vickers Type)
Fuse
obstacle.
At this instant the lower percussion arrangement, releasing itself from the grip of the lugs of the counter safety catch and compressing the counter safety spring, approaches the needle, which punctures the detonating cap
;
the flame from the latter together with the flame from the powder of the chamber bushing are transmitted to the bursting charge in the shrapnel shell. When the fuse is set for "grape shot," the transmitting openings in the time rings and the ignition openings in the flange of the stem
228
are brought so close to one another that the bursting of the shrapnel must take place on the average not farther than 42 feet in front of the muzzle of the gun. Russian Combination Time and Percussion Fuse Vickers
Since the outbreak of the present war, various Type. fuses have been used on Russian shrapnel shells. One of
the principal of these fuses is the Vickers type of combination time and percussion fuse shown assembled in Fig. 1, and in detail in Figs. 2, 3, 4, and 5. While the original Russian fuse shown in Fig. 4, Chapter I, and described in the preceding pages, has, up to the present war, been the only fuse used in this shell, it has largely been replaced by
^
Fig.
3.
H0.20
0.1 02
0.035
.152
BOTTOM RING
TOP RING ALUMINUM
ALUMINUM
Machinery
Top and Bottom Time Rings on Russian Combination Time

and Percussion Fuse (Vickers Type)
other fuses, because of the difficulties experienced in manufacturing it. The Vickers type of fuse is somewhat easier to manufacture and, therefore, has been used to some extent on Russian shrapnel shells. Another fuse that is now being adapted to the Russian shrapnel shell is the American
combination time and percussion fuse, Fig. 3, Chapter I, which is also of the same type as the British fuse described in Chapter XI. The chief difference in design between the
24THDS.PERINCHR.H.
I1.4L1.39 ,. -H 1.618 1 122L0.12-*) \^ I* __ 14 THDS.PER NCH R.H. CAP.

,
TABLET BOTTOM RING,

INTERPOSED BETWEEN CAP AND LINEN
TABLET TOP
RIN
VEGETABLE PAPER
VEGETABLE PAPER
WASHER BODY
CLOTH THICKNESS H 0.045
L
WASHER, BOTTOM RING,

VEGETABLE PAPeR
WASHER, BOTTOM RING,

CLOTH
THICKNESS H 0.0*5
L 0.035
0.035
DISK.
TABLET, FLASH HOLE

IN
ESCAPE HOLE.
2
vFf-ETArn e PAPER
RING, SILK PAPER
TOP
PER FUSE
DISK ' ESCAPE HOLE . ALUMINUM 2 PER FUSE
STIRRUP SPRING, TIME

RD-ROLLED SHEET BRASS
Fig.
4.
Details
of
Russian
Combination
Fuse
(Vickers Type)
229
230
WIRE 0.04
4
DIA.
(APPROX.)
DIA.
STRANDS 0.018
END OF WIRE SECURED IN FLANGE OF FUSE BODY LENGTH OF WIRE-ABOUT 15..5
-H 0.575
0.567
5\
FERRULE
BRASS
STRIP SECURING WIRE
DISK,
SCREW
DISK
i
COTTON TAPE CEMENTED TO COVER
PLUG PERCUSSION
PELLET,
TIME
PAPER
DETONATOR, CARD-BOARD
Machinery
Fig.
5.
Details of
Russian Combination Time and Percussion Fuse (Vickers Type)
standard Russian and the Vickers type of combination time and percussion fuse is in the percussion and concussion arrangements. It will be noticed in Figs. 1 to 5, inclusive, that the details of the Vickers fuse are much simpler to manufacture. There is also an absence of the numerous springs in the original Russian fuse.
CHAPTER IX
SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE MANUFACTURE AND INSPECTION OF RUSSIAN 3-INCH SHRAPNEL AND HIGH-EXPLOSIVE CARTRIDGE CASES
The following
specifications are abstracted
from the
offi-
cial specifications for the
Russian brass cartridge cases for
3-inch shrapnel and high-explosive shells, and contain all the essential information relating to the requirements in the manufacture and inspection of these cartridge cases. Clause 1 The Rights and Duties of the Inspector. The inspector's duty consists not only in acceptance of the cartridge cases manufactured, but also in looking after the methods used in the manufacture of the cartridge cases, and the brass used for them. In order to do this, the inspector must have the right of access to any work and tests referring to the cartridge cases he must have the right to enter any shop during any time of the day or night, where the manufacture of the cartridge cases ordered may take place, i. e., the casting and rolling of the brass, drawing,
.
annealing, finishing, etc. If the firm with whom the order for the cartridge cases is placed does not cast brass, but obtains it from other works, the inspector has the right to visit these latter works in order to ascertain the quality of the casting (and qualities of copper and zinc) method of cutting the top and bottom parts of castings, method of rolling, etc. The inspector's
,
expenses with reference to his journey to the brass works must be borne by the firm with which the order for the cartridge cases has been placed. The minimum number of the necessary journeys must be determined before the placing of the order. The firm, which is manufacturing the cartridge cases, must have a testing machine for the mechanical tests of the metal used for the cartridge cases; it must also possess a microphotographical laboratory for the brass (the power of the microscope must be at least 100). The firm must
in such case
231
232
RUSSIAN CARTRIDGE CASE
furnish the inspector with the results of all the chemical, microscopical, thermal, mechanical and any other tests carried out on the brass used for the manufacture of cartridge In addicases, as well as on cartridge cases themselves.
tion to this, the inspector must be given the right to use all the firm's testing plant for the above-mentioned tests. The inspector must carry out the specified tests mentioned in the following for the acceptance of the cartridge cases. Independently of the above, if the inspector thinks it necessary, for the purpose of ascertaining the qualities and evenness of the material used for the cartridge cases, as well as the cartridge cases themselves, to carry out in addi-
WEIGHT OF CASE WITHOUT PRIMER DRAM NCES 2 9
H. 12.776"
L.
12.736-
H.15.168"L. 15.148
Machinery
Russian 3-inch Cartridge Case
tion
some other
trials,
the firm must provide
him with
all
necessary assistance.
The firm must place at the sole disposal of the inspector sufficiently large dry and heated accommodations for carrying out his inspection, provided with cupboards for his gages; scales must also be provided; the place must be lighted by electricity, and all necessary power for the inspection must be provided gages and a microscope of from 40 to 50 power. All gages used for the gaging of cartridge cases must be checked by the inspector before the beginning of the inBefore submitspection, as well as during the inspection. ting the cartridge cases manufactured to the inspector, the
;
;
233
works must submit them to their own examiners. These examiners must work according to the rules given them by the works, and prepared in conjunction with the inspector. The firm must provide their examiners with a separate set of gages manufactured similarly to those supplied to the
inspector.
The inspector has the right to inform the management works of all defects noticed by him in the manufacture of the cartridge cases, as well as of those defects which
of the
occur in the cartridge cases submitted for acceptance. Finally, he has the right to suggest some improvements in the manufacture of the cartridge cases it is left to the discretion of the management of the works to make use of the above suggestions, if it is found advisable by them to do so, but the inspector has no right whatever to interfere with the orders issued by the management of the works. Clause 2. Test Consignment. Before beginning the manufacture of the order, the works must submit a test consignment. The cartridge cases for test consignment must be manufactured to the approved drawings, and made of brass according to these specifications. During the manufacture of the cartridge cases, it is required: That the annealing of the cartridge cases shall be 1. regulated to prevent any over-heating of the metal. 2. That after the cartridge case is properly formed, the upper half of the case shall be definitely annealed at a temperature not less than 400 degrees C. That the mechanical quality of the metal in the manu3. factured cartridge case shall be in accordance with these The method of manufacturing the cartridge specifications. cases, as well as the regulation of the annealing before drawing, is left to the discretion of the works. The test consignment must be inspected and gaged by the inspector, and then sent for firing tests. The inspector must measure, on all cartridge cases in the test consignment, the diameter of the case near the bottom next to the flange, at a distance of !/2 an d l*/2 inch from the flange. After firing the first round, all cartridge cases must be inspected and measured on the same diameters on which
;
234
The cartridge cases they were measured before firing. showing the maximum increase of diameter are to be resized after each round, together with those that are doubtful with regard to strength, if such re-sizing is allowed by these specifications. The cartridge cases spoiled during re-sizing must be replaced by new ones from the same consignment, but these new cases must be fired the same number of rounds as the old spoilt cases. The consignment will be accepted: 1. If all cartridge cases after firing are extracted without any difficulty. 2. If no case shows longitudinal or transverse cracks (or any other cracks). The cartridge cases which are supplied together with shell must be checked and examined in order to ascertain whether the shells are sufficiently secured in the case. The test consignment of cartridges must be manufactured at the expense of the works, but the tests are carried out at the expense of the government. In the case of an unsatisfactory test of the first consignment, the works have the right to submit a second test consignment. In the case of unsatisfactory results of the tests of the second consignment, the military administration has the right to cancel the contract. The inspector has to weigh all cartridge cases of the test consignment, ascertaining thus the mean weight. In addition, the inspector must carry out the following test on the cartridge cases of the test consignment: 1. Chemical composition of brass. 2. Mechanical and microphotographical qualities of metal in the manufactured cartridge cases. 3. The temperature of the last annealing, i. e., the temperature of annealing before last drawing, temperature before compressing, and temperature of the final annealing of the finished cartridge case. The temperatures of annealing must be ascertained by pyrometers. For this purpose such pyrometers as Ferry may be used, in which the temperature is ascertained by the color of the object heated.
235
The methods of manufacture of the order of cartridge cases must be similar to those used for the manufacture of In case of any alterations in the method test consignment. of manufacture, the works must inform the inspector to that effect, and he must report the matter to the military
administration with his opinion on the value of such alteraIt is left to the discretion of the military administration to allow such alteration or to demand from the works the delivery of a new test consignment. firm which has already manufactured cartridge cases of certain type may be released from the delivery of a test consignment, provided the methods of manufacture have not been altered. The brass Clause 3. The Acceptance of the Brass. used in the manufacture of cartridge cases must be of the
tion in manufacture.
following composition
from 67 to 72 per cent. from 33 to 28 per cent. The proportion of other metals must not exceed 0.5 per cent, except tin, which must not exceed 0.3 per cent. During the manufacture of cartridge cases in the same consignment, the variation of copper in the brass must 0.5 per cent compared with not exceed + 1 per cent, or the usual composition used by the works which composition must be given to the inspector before the manufacture of the test consignment. The method of manufacture of brass is left to the discretion of the works. The only requireCopper
Zinc
ments are as follows:
The cast ingots must be annealed before first rolling. All rolling must be carried out in the same direction, thus allowing the top end of the casting always to be distin1.
2.
guishable.
must not be used for the manufacture of cartridge cases. They must be cut from the ingots by the works manufacturing the brass, or the blanks for the cartridge cases must be cut at a certain distance from both ends of the ingots. On receipt of the brass ingots, the works manufacturing the cartridge cases must inform the inspector to that effect, giving him
of the castings
The top or bottom portion
236
the chemical analysis and the composition of the casting. The consignment of the brass must be sufficient for the manufacture from it of the whole consignment of the cart-
ridge cases. At the works which manufacture the brass, test bars must be cast from the same furnace and from material of the same quality, melted in a similar manner, and stamped with the same number as the castings. This number must be stamped at the bottom of the cartridge
case.
The brass used for tests must be submitted to the inspector in bars, and the cutting of the test disks from the bars must be carried out under the inspector's supervision. few bars are to be used for the microscopical analysis. The
bars of each consignment must be stamped with a number, which number must be stamped afterwards on the blanks during all the drawings. This number must also be stamped on the bottom of the case, as mentioned. These numbers must be put by the inspector in the report together with
chemical analysis of metal, composition of casting, number of rods delivered, time of delivery, name of brass foundry by which the brass has been supplied (if the manufacturers do not manufacture brass themselves), and the number of test disks cut. For each consignment of cartridge cases manufactured from brass bearing a certain number, at least one chemical analysis must be made. The brass not answering to the requirements of the chemical analysis will be returned to the manufacturer for re-casting. To insure that the amount cut off from the top and bottom of the rods is sufficient, the inspector must ascertain from the first consignment the number of cartridges manufactured, with defects inside as well as outside, from (1)
from upper end of rod, (2) disks cut from roller end of rod, and (3) disks cut from the remaining part of rod. The percentage of cartridge cases with defects, in the above-mentioned three groups, must not differ materially from each other. The above-mentioned tests must be carried out from time to time during the manufacture of the
disks cut
cartridge cases.
237
The following methods can be used to ascertain that the ends of any rod are cut off sufficiently: At the center of the rod, cut a piece from the top of 1. the upper blank; the transverse surface of the piece must be polished and etched with a weak solution of nitric acid if the piece cut off from the top end was not sufficient, the test piece will show, in the middle, more or less solid black
;
which, under the microscope, it will be posand foreign substances. 2. The transverse test piece cut in the above-mentioned manner must be broken in a testing machine; if the top portion was not sufficiently cut off, the middle of the piece will show ruptures in the metal. Clause 4. The Arrangement of the Cartridge Cases in Lots. The cartridge cases for delivery must be arranged in lots. It is desirable that the cartridge cases in each lot should be manufactured from one casting of brass metal. If the lots are compiled from the cartridge cases of different castings, it will be necessary to select cartridge cases for the control test from all the castings, and the cases left over from the lots already tested and accepted may be placed in the new lots without repeated tests. The dimensions of punch and die for the last drawing must be verified from time to time. The control of the annealing must be carried out by means of a pyrometer. The 1. cartridge cases in each lot must be inspected as follows 2. Outside inspection. of dimensions and Inspection weight. 3. Mechanical test of the metal. 4. Firing test. Clause 5. Outside Inspection. The cartridge cases, before submission for inspection, must be cleaned inside and outside with sawdust and sand, or with brushes. The following defects usually occur in the cases. 1. Cracks. Longitudinal cracks chiefly occur at a distance of two or three inches from the flange, and, generlines, inside of
sible to see small microscopical flaws
ally speaking,
form two
parallel lines very slightly notice-
Transversal cracks, slightly nooccur above the flange at the bottom they ticeable, generally are always on the outside surface and very seldom penetrate through. Cases with such defects must be rejected.
;
able on the inner surface.
238
2. Ruptures. These defects usually are on the outer or inner surface of the cases and show that something is wrong with the metal cartridge cases with ruptures are reSlight ruptures jected without further consideration. found in the corner of the socket for the primer do not affect the strength of the case and are, therefore, allowed. 3. Flaws and Fissures. Cases submitted to the inspector after being filed and cleaned on the inner surface are reCases with flaws and fissures on the inside surjected. face must be submitted to the inspector separately from the others and the filing of them must be carried out under the inspector's supervision. The inspector has to determine to what extent the flaws are vital. Special attention must be paid to the flaws on the rim and on the tapered portion. 4. Scratches. These are usually due to the punch, or to dirt which may have been in the punch. Small scratches do not vitally affect the strength of the cases. Oases with deep scratches are rejected, especially if on the inner side of the case a very noticeable mark is seen, extending to the lower part of the case. 5. Scars. Small scars which make the surface of the case dull are allowed. Large scars on the surface giving the appearance of a grained surface indicate too high a temperature in annealing, and cases with such scars must be
;
rejected.
Dents. Dents, if rectified, are allowed on cases if are not important they are not allowed on the conical they portion or at the end of the case. 7. Goffering. Goffering on the inner surface of the case is usually due to the uneven drawing of the metal in the case of very rigid material it is due to defects in the uniformity of the material. Goffering does not appreciably affect the strength of the cases, and therefore cannot generally be taken as a reason for rejection. large amount of goffered cases shows that there are some abnormal conditions in the manufacturing of the brass or the cases themselves. In such cases the inspector must point this out to the works, and if the works will not take measures to remove these defects the goffered cases must be rejected.
6.
;

8.
239
Folds of metal are sometimes noticed inside the case at the bottom and show bad manufacture. Cases with such defects are rejected. 9. Other Small Defects. Dents at the bottom, inside, and other small defects are allowed at the discretion of the
Folds.
inspector.
Clause 6.
side inspection
mum
Cases which pass satisfactory outGaging. must be gaged by means of gages for maxiand minimum allowances. The dimensions gaged are
as follows:
1. All outside diameters of the cases must be gaged with ring gages or half ring gages. 2. The inner diameter of the end of the case is gaged
with calipers.
3.
All outside dimensions of the bottom of the case are

:
as follows
(a)
(b)
(c)
Diameters of flanges by half ring gages. Thickness of flanges with snap gages. Concentricity of the bottom of the case by ring
4. 5.
gage. The thickness of the bottom by special gage. Concentricity of the hole for the primer, by special
gage.
All dimensions of the hole for the primer must be gaged with a set of corresponding gages. 7. The flatness of the surface, the absence of cuts and hammering of the metal around the hole for the primer with
6.
a straightedge.
8.
9.
The outline and the length by a special gage. The thickness of the walls is gaged by means
of a
snap gage with cut corresponding to the thickness of the cartridge case at the end, by a small special gage with
pointer for ascertaining the thickness of the walls as well as the depth of the cleaning away in places near the end of the case, and by a special gage with pointer for ascer-
taining the thickness of the walls along the whole length of the case. For the purpose of ascertaining that the outline of the cases is correct, the inspector has the right to select 0.2 per
240
cent of the cases
from the
lot,
choosing preferably from the
rejected cases; special attention must be paid to the difference in thickness of the walls at the lower end of the cases.
To ascertain the similarity in weight, all cases must be ,weighed the difference from mean weight must not exceed the limits fixed for each caliber of the cases. If during the preliminary examination of the cases more than 15 per cent are found defective, as regards the metal or dimensions, the inspector has the right to stop the further
;
examination of the cases submitted, and to ask the firm to re-submit them again. If, after re-submitting, and during the second examination of the cases, more than 5 per cent are found unsatisfactory, the whole lot will be rejected. Clause 7. Mechanical Tests. In the following paragraphs are given special conditions for the acceptance of As a cartridge cases for the guns of different calibers. general rule, the mechanical qualities of the metal used for cartridge cases must comply with the following conditions 1. The rigidity of the bottom and the lower end of the cases must be sufficient to insure the proper extraction of the cases. 2. The rigidity of the end of the cartridge must insure the proper grip of the shell, and for the howitzer cases must not show any dents on the metal. 3. The rigidity of the metal along the whole length of the case must change evenly, without sudden changes. During the manufacture of the cases, care should be taken to work the metal as near as possible to the lower limits of the rigidity of the metal, as any extra rigidity affects the strength of the case during firing and in storage. The mechanical qualities of the cases must, as far as possible, be alike; they are tested (a) by a breaking test of the metal used for the cases (b) by ascertaining that the shell is fixed properly in the case (a casting may be used for this purpose manufactured to the dimensions and the weight of the proper shell) (c) microscopical analysis of the metal; and (d) any other methods at the discretion of the inspector, as, for instance, by ascertaining the hardness of the metal, compression of the mouth of the case, etc.
:
241
For the
about
tensile test the inspector selects
five cases rejected
from each lot on account of the dimensions these

;
are cut in halves for the purpose of ascertaining the thickness of the walls. The number of cases used for mechanical tests may be increased by the inspector if it is required by the quality of the material. From each case selected for the mechanical test, three rings must be cut, one inch wide one next to the flange, iy% inch above it; one from the middle of the mouth; and one immediately under the conical portion, if such portion exists otherwise from the middle of the case. The rings cut in the above manner must be cut
; ;
longitudinally and straightened by delicate hammering with a wooden mallet or by rolling between wooden rollers. From
each strip obtained in such manner two test pieces must be cut with a distance between marks of 1.97 inch (50 millimeters). The width of the test pieces must be the same. Ten division marks must be made on the test pieces, each division being 0.197 inch (5 millimeters). During the mechanical test, the following data must be ascertained:
Breaking stress, total elongation, and local elongation between all division marks. Clause 8. Firing Proof. After the examination of the whole consignment, the inspector selects some cases for proof by firing. The inspector chooses for the firing trials those cases which he considers the least satisfactory. The works have the right to re-examine the cases selected by the inspector for firing, and remove any case selected by the inspector but, in such an instance, all cases with similar defects are to be rejected, and the inspector replaces the cases removed by the firm. The works have not the right to remove the cases selected in the above manner more than twice for each consignment. The firing proof of the cases must be carried out at any place selected by the artillery administration, where the cases must be delivered by the works. The firing proof must be carried out in a similar manner to the test consignment, and the submitted consignment is
;
accepted
1.
If all cartridge cases after firing are extracted withdifficulty.
out any
242
2.

If
no case shows longitudinal, transversal or any
other cracks, or ruptures of metal. If during the firing trials one case shows a crack or is difficult to extract, the works have the right to review the consignment and submit for the firing trials a second set chosen by the inspector. In such instances, the works have no right to remove any case selected by the inspector for secondary proof the number of cases selected for secondary proof as well as the number of proof rounds fired may be increased. For the acceptance of the consignment, all cases must give satisfactory results in the second firing test. If the two consecutive firing proofs will give unsatisfactory results, the artillery administration has the right to cancel the contract. The firing proof is carried out at the expense of the government, and the cases normally used are counted as part of the consignment. The fired cases, after re-sizing, annealing and inspection, are submitted by the works to the inspector, and afterwards they must be packed in separate
;
boxes. cases required for secondary proof expense of the manufacturer.
The
must be
at the
Clause 9. Varnishing. In case of satisfactory results of firing proof, the works varnish the cases inside as well as outside. The varnish must be used evenly. When
scratched with a wooden point or with the finger nail, the varnished surface must not show any impression; when scratched with a metallic point the varnish must not crumThe varnish on ple, and must not show any cross cracks. the cases must not alter its appearance if placed for twentyfour hours in water, and after removal from the water and again dry, it must adhere so firmly as not to be removable
under pressure of the
finger.
0.94.
specific gravity of the varnish must be from 0.9 to Brass strips covered with the varnish must not show any oxidizing action. After the heating of the varnished strips during 24 hours in the water bath at a temperature of 167 degrees F., the varnish, when heated, must not peel
off.
The
For the purpose of ascertaining the character of the reaction of the varnish, 10 cubic centimeters (0.61 cubic
243
inches) of solvent must be distilled from 100 cubic centimeters (6.1 cubic inches) of the varnish, and the solvent obtained in this manner, when mixed with a weak solution of litmus, must not give an acid reaction. The cases must be stamped as Clause 10. Stamping. follows: On the top, the number of the consignment of brass at the left, number of the consignment of the cases and the year of manufacture; on the right, the firm's initials at the bottom, the inspector's stamp, which must be
;
placed after the inspection, and the stamp which means accepted and which must be placed after the firing proof. The letters and figures must not exceed Vs inch in height. The cases, after being wrapped Clause 11. Packing. in paper, are covered with straw caps and packed in strong wooden boxes. These must be dovetailed from pine or fir wood, with rope handles and iron bands. The lids must be
fixed with screws. The works have to pack the cases to the satisfaction of the inspector. To ascertain the accuracy of packing, the inspector turns over one of the boxes chosen, and after that the case must not show any dents or any noticeable damage to the varnish on the cases. Fifty cases are packed in each box. The boxes must have the following marking:
Accepted Cases:
Fired Cases:
Caliber of Cases Name of Works Year of Manufacture
Caliber of Cases Name of Works
Year of Manufacture
Number Number
of Cases in Lot
Number
of Consignment
of Cases in Lot but Good for Use Fired,
Number
Condition for Acceptance
Field
of Cartridge
of Consignment Cases for 3-inch
Guns.
cartridge cases.
The test consignment must consist of fifty The proof must be carried out from the
gun with pressure of about 15.75 tons per square inch (2400 atmospheres). Ten cases are selected from those showing the maximum increase of diameter and are used for recharging; they must be re-annealed after each round; all doubtful cases must be added to the above-mentioned cases. Each of these cases must stand eight rounds.
244

as follows
:
The gaging must be carried out

1.
Dimensions
in
Normal
Inches Reject
Diameter of the case near bottom, gaged with

half ring gages
2.
3.
Diameter of
gaged with half ring gages The outside diameter of the end, gaged with half ring gages, and with gage inserted in
flange,
3.294 3.547
3.286 3.539
the case
4. 5. 6.
The inner diameter of the case The thickness of the flange The thickness of the bottom,
special
3.004 2.923 0.142
3.000 2.9?7 0.134
gaged
with
0.157
gage
$+0030
"j
0.010
7.
The concentricity
special gage.
of the hole for the primer
must be gaged with
8.
The concentricity
of the flange with reference to the body must be gaged with half ring gage, the dimensions of which must be
9.
10.
as follows: Maximum diameter of flange. (a) Maximum diameter of the case at bottom. (b) Maximum thickness of the flange. (c) The outline and the length of the case must be checked by special chamber gage. The allowance for length must be 0.010 inch. The gaging of the hole for the primer is carried out by the fol-
lowing gages:
(a) (b)
Screw gages, normal and reject. Normal gage which is used for the gaging of the whole diameter and the depth of the hole for the primer, normal and reject.
11. 12.
Reject gage for the flange of the primer. Reject gage for the thread. (e) Reject gage for the plain surface of the hole. Normal and reject gages for the thickness of the hole for the (f) flange of the primer. Normal and reject gage for the depth of the plain portion of (g) the hole, (k) Gage for the ignition hole. Normal and reject gage for the height of the boss for the primer. Gages, compasses and special gages for the thickness of the walls and for the depth of filing of the inner as well as the outer
(c)
(d)
surfaces.
13.
Straightedge for gaging the bottom surface of the case.
The difference in the weight of cases from mean weight must not exceed 3 ounces. The test pieces subjected to the tensile test must show
the following breaking stress: At the ends, 48,000 to 57,000 pounds per square (a) inch, with local elongation not less than 60 per cent. Next to the flange, from 64,000 to 85,000 pounds (b)
per square inch.
Next to the conical portion, not (c) pounds per square inch.
less
than 52,500

Firing Trial.
245
thirty
For the
firing
trials,
cartridge
cases
must be
selected.
These cases must be measured and
must pass a similar test to that of the test consignment, with the following exceptions. 1. Only five cases are taken for re-proving, including
cases showing the maximum expansion, and those doubtful with reference to their strength.
The cases are to be fired five times. During the firing of the secondary proofs, as well as during the firing of the cases selected from the lots entirely
2.
consisting of the defective cases, the number of cases as well as the number of re-tests may be increased to the num-
ber fixed for the test consignment.
The charge primer consists Specifications for Primers. of brass body, detonator, bush, brass anvil, a charge of gun powder (not polished with graphite) a disk of saltpe,
ter-soaked tissue paper, four powder cakes, disk of saltpeter-soaked muslin, disk of parchment, and a brass disk bored in the center and coated outside with thick shellac varnish mixed with cinnabar. The detonator consists of a small copper Detonator. cap containing a charge of 0.275 grain of the detonator composition, covered by a thin paper parchment disk and compressed with a pressure of 125 pounds. The thickness of the parchment is between 0.002 and 0.0025 inch. The surface of the parchment facing the composition is coated by a thin layer of fluid shellac varnish composed as follows: 15.12 gallons of 95 per cent alcohol and 20 pounds of shellac.
The detonator composition contains 50 per cent fulminate of mercury, 20 per cent chlorate of potassium and 30 per cent glass ground to dust and sifted through a sieve No. 100
(100 meshes to 1 inch). To this mixture is added 0.25 per cent of tragacanth gum and a trace of gum arabic. The composition is placed in the cap while moist. After compression the detonator is dried for ten days at a temperature of
88 degrees F., and twenty days at 111 degrees F. Then the exterior surface of the parchment disks is coated with a thick varnish composed of 0.891 gallon of 95 per cent alcohol, 2.75
pounds of
shellac,
and
0.5
pound of
resin.
The
246
varnished detonators are dried at room temperature for five or six days, and then undergo a final examination, in which the defective caps will be rejected. The caps, when ready, must have even wedges, no rents, cracks, dents or such like defects, and the parchment disks must be placed concentric with the edges of the caps. Out of a lot representing a day's output (about from 10,000 to 15,000) of detonators, twenty-five are set aside without selection, for testing under a drop weight of 13.65 ounces, falling from a height of 3.94 inches. These must not show a single failure. If a day's output of detonators does not answer that condition, it undergoes, after a supplementary drying, a second test in double quantity. Any lot of detonators that does not stand this test will be rejected and burnt out. The tissue paper and muslin disks are soaked with a 10 per cent solution of saltpeter. The powder cakes are compressed gun powder, not polished with graphite, and have a diameter of 0.748 inch, a height of about 0.120 inch, and
weigh from 21.95 to 23.32 grains each. The charging of primers is preceded Charging Primers. the examination of their bodies and other parts. The by The detonator is charging is done in the following order placed in the bush which is screwed onto the end into its seat and then nipped in two places in order to prevent its becoming unscrewed. The anvil is then screwed into its seat, so as to press tightly on the detonator composition, without, however, cutting the parchment disk. To inspect the proper screwing in of the anvils, 30 primers are set aside out of every 300, and from those the anvils are screwed The parchment disks out and the detonators examined. must bear clear marks of the anvils, without being cut
:
through. In properly fitted primers the anvils are prevented from becoming unscrewed by nipping them in two places. A charge of from 10.286 to 10.972 grains of powder is placed in the groove between the hose and the internal surface of the body of the primer. This charge must fill the groove to the brim. The powder is now covered with the disk of

tissue paper soaked in saltpeter.
247
On the top of it will be placed four powder cakes, which will be covered first with a disk of saltpeter-soaked muslin, then with a parchment disk and lastly with a brass disk bored in the center, after which the upper edge of the primer is closed in, this operation being carried out in three stages. After the first pressing, a proper position is given to the disks inside the primer after the third (final) pressing the primer is to be gaged. The upper side of the brass and parchment disks is varnished with thick shellac mixed with cinnabar. After having been dried in the shop for 24 hours, the primers are packed in cardboard boxes. Two such boxes, (50 primers in each) are sealed hermetically in zinc boxes. The proper hermetic soldering of some boxes chosen at random will be tested. Eight zinc boxes are packed in one wooden box, which will thus contain 400 primers. Bodies and other details will be Inspection of Primers. of brass, the composition of which will be manufactured left to the discretion of the works, but on the express con;
stipulated.
comply with all requirements have been obtained when the metal contained from 67 to 74 per cent of copper, and from
dition that the primers will The best results
33 to 26 per cent of zinc. Before beginning the manufacture of the order, the works with which the order will be placed must deliver a test consignment consisting of 100 primers. The test consignment of primers after being charged must be subThe conditions of this trial are jected to a firing trial. similar to those used for the trials of the complete order. The order must be submitted in lots of 25,000 each. The gaging of dimensions at the works manufacturing the primers must be carried out after each separate operation of manufacture, for which approved gages and control gages must be used. All the gages must be manufactured
by the works, with which the order for the primers
is
placed, with the exception of the gage nut used for the gaging of the outer thread and the check screw for same. The
last mentioned gages must be handed over works by the proper authorities.
to the
primer
248
The primers, before being charged, will be assembled at the works which manufacture them, i. e., bushes and anvils are screwed in, and the primers are delivered to the exploworks in such condition. After the completion of the manufacture of a lot of 25,000 primers, 1000 of them, chosen at random during the manufacture, will be sent to the explosive works for inspection, for testing the rigidity of the metal, and for preliminary tests of the metal by firing. If, during the trial for the rigidity of the metal carried out by the compression of 50 primers chosen at random, more than 5 per cent show ruptures, the complete lot of 1000
sive
primers will be returned to the manufacturers.

In the case of satisfactory results of firing trials, the remaining 24,000 primers will be delivered to the works intrusted with the charging. If, after partial examination of a lot (not less than 1000 primers), more than 10 per cent of primers will be rejected in accordance with the following two paragraphs, the further inspection will be stopped at the charging works, and the whole lot will be returned for resorting. When inspecting primers, the following defects are not allowed ruptures, blow-holes, fissures, flaws, sandy surface, dirt, oil, dust, shavings, dents on the bottom surface of the flange, dents at the bottom of the charge chamber, and considerable crumbling of threads (more than one-fourth of a The examination of the bottom surface for eventhread) ness must be carried out by spinning the primers on a polished steel plate. The primers which will not spin must be
: .
rejected.
The primer chambers must be varnished. The anvils must not show any flaws and fissures at their striking edge and at the threads. The striking edge must not be sharp, to prevent the cutting through of the parchment disks of the detonator; generally speaking, the anvil and the bush must also answer all the requirements of the preceding
paragraph. One hundred primers complete from each lot Gaging. must be gaged. Special attention must be paid to the following points
:
249
All primers to be screwed into gage without being (a) specially loose. The thickness and the outer diameter of the primer (b)
head must not exceed the specified maximum dimensions, thus securing the proper fit of the primer flange in its seat in the cartridge case. The height of the boss inside the primer must be (c) strictly in accordance with the allowance given. The inner thread of the boss must be strictly in (d) accordance with the gage. The seat for the detonator and the hole in the bush (e) must be correct and in accordance with the gage. The thickness of the bottom of primer (0.067 to (f) 0.077 inch) must be in accordance with the gage. The anvils and bushes must screw and unscrew easily, After without being loose and must be interchangeable. all primers will be inspected with regard to their charging, height, and gaged outside. In case of unsatisfactory results
in gaging (rejected primers exceeding 3 per cent) an additional 100 primers must be chosen for the same purpose, and in case the results are the same, the whole lot will be re-
turned to the works manufacturing the primers for resorting.
Fifty primers out of 1000 delivered from Firing Trials. a lot of 25,000, after being charged, are tested with reference to the quality of the metal, by firing with increased charge at a pressure of 2400 atmospheres (15.75 tons per square inch). These primers, after the test, should not
show any breakage (after being unscrewed) through cracks and flaws, the presence of which would mean that the gas escaped through the base of the primers. The escape of
gases leaving a residue between the side surfaces of the primer flanges and their seating is allowed on not more than 30 per cent of the primers subjected to firing test from new 'cartridge cases; in the case of using fired cartridge cases, no attention must be paid to the presence of the
above-mentioned residue. Non-through cracks are allowed on not more than 2 per cent of tested primers; in the case of a larger percentage,
250
but not exceeding 4 per cent, the whole lot must be resorted and retested. The recurrence of 2 per cent of non-through cracks in the second test may not be taken as a reason for the rejection of the whole lot; 50 primers must be used for the second test. In the case of the absence of above-mentioned defects, only those primers will be considered satisfactory which, after firing, can be removed from the cartridge case by hand or by an ordinary spanner. The serviceableness of the primers is determined by firing 50 primers chosen at random from the complete lot of 25,000 charged primers. The conditions just laid down hold good for this trial also. In addition to this, no complete misfire must occur; not more than two primers may
misfire once each, with lock in proper order. (Before firing, the tension of the main spring and the protrusion of the second test may be carried firing pin must be verified.)
The secduring the preliminary test defects occur. ond test must be carried out on double the number of primers taken at random, i. e., on 100 primers. During second test the same conditions as laid down for the first Primers passing successfully the first or test hold good. second firing tests are accepted for the service. A lot of charged rejected primers must be destroyed and the metal
out
if
scrapped. In addition to the firing tests, the following test must be carried out by the works intrusted with the charging of primers to determine the correctness of charging: 1. One per cent of a day's output must be tested under a drop weight of five pounds falling from a height of 0.39
inch with
flat firing
pin 0.25 inch in diameter
during this
test no primer must detonate. Primers having passed this test and not showing any noticeable mark on the base must be recharged and added to the lot. 2. When testing 0.5
per cent of each day's output under a drop weight of five pounds, falling from a height of 5.9 inches, with firing pin of an approved pattern, no primer must fail to explode.
CHAPTER X
SPECIFICATIONS FOR BRITISH 18-POUNDER QUICK-FIRING SHRAPNEL SHELL
The following paragraphs, abstracted from the
all
official
the information contained in these specifications, give to the manufacture and inspection of specifications relating the British 18-pounder, quick-firing shrapnel shell. The body of the shell is made of cast or forged Body. steel of the best quality for the purpose, turned or ground to the form and dimensions, and having the edge of the base rounded. If made of cast steel, the casting must be clean, of uniform transverse thickness, free from flaws,, The use of chaplets is problow-holes, and other defects. If made of forged steel, the body must be forged hibited. Should the hollow, and free from forging marks and flaws. shells be subjected to heat-treatment, this must be carried out in batches consisting of shells of the same cast. An
undercut groove, with two projecting waved ribs, will be turned on the body. Three chisel cuts may be made across the waved ribs in the groove for the driving band, at an angle to the longitudinal axis of the projectile to allow the air in the channels between the ribs to escape when the band The top is threaded to receive the is being pressed on. socket, and a groove for the fuse cover provided. The steel body alone must weigh 6 pounds 5 ounces 12 drams, plus or
minus 2 ounces.
of
The driving band is made from a ring Driving Band. drawn or electro-deposited copper, pressed into, and in contact with, the bottom and undercut of the groove in the
shell all around,
and accurately turned to the form required. The weight must be 4 ounces 12 drams, plus or minus 2
Socket.
ounces.
known
to
fit
The socket is made of composition metal, as Class "C," threaded externally below the shoulder the body, and internally to receive the fuse, the bottom
being bored to receive the top of the central tube.

251
The
252
BRITISH SHRAPNEL SHELL
junction of the socket and central tube is soldered to prevent the resin getting into the tube and socket. A hole is to be bored in the side, threaded and fitted with a steel fixing screw. The weight must be 8 ounces 8 drams. Central Tube. The central tube may be made of brass, copper, delta metal, or gun metal. The lower end is to have
REMOVE SHARP
INNER E
OF SCREW HOLE
SOLDER JUNCTION BETWEEN SOCKET AND CENTRAL TUBE
TUBE TO BE FLUSH WITH BOTTOM OF FUSE SOCKET
RESIN
Machinery
Fig.
1.
Construction of British 18-pounder Quick-firing Shrapnel Shell
a shoulder to rest on, and to be threaded to enter the steel disk, the bottom being reduced in diameter to fit the neck of the cup. Weight, 2 ounces 12 drams. steel disk, of the form shown in Fig. 2, Steel Disk. will rest on the shoulder in the bottom of the body, a hole
253
to receive the central tube.
being bored and threaded through the center of the disk Weight, 9 ounces 8 drams. Tin Cup. The cup in the base of the shell to contain the bursting charge will be made of tinned plate to the form and dimensions shown in Fig. 2, the parts being soldered Weight, 1 ounce 12 drams. together. Contractors may send their gages at any time Gages. to the chief inspector, Woolwich Arsenal, London, England, to be checked and compared with the standard gages. The screw threads must, unless otherScrew Threads wise stated, be of "the British standard fine screw thread, and conform to the chief inspector's standard gages. The Preliminary Examination of Contractor's Work. after completion of machining, will be submitted at bodies, the contractor's works, to an inspector, for preliminary examination. Bodies made of cast steel must also be submitted for a hydraulic test under a pressure of 100 pounds per
square inch.
fails to satisfy
shell which shows the slightest leak, or the conditions, will be rejected. The tin cup, steel disk, and central tube Assembling. in position and the shell filled with mixed are to be placed metal bullets, 41 per pound (composed of seven parts of lead and one of antimony), the interstices between the bullets being filled with resin, which must be perfectly pure, and filtered when in a liquid state through a sieve having 32 meshes per inch. The socket is then screwed onto the body as tightly as possible, the threads having been previously coated with Pettman's cement or red lead. The shells are to be marked on the Marking and Plugs. Plugs for the protection of side, above the driving band. the fuse holes in transit will be supplied, free of charge, on demand, by the ordnance officer to whom delivery is to be made. The shells will be covered with a thin (a). Delivery. coating of vaseline or other similar anti-corrosive grease, which must be of such a nature as not to interfere with the gaging, and they will then be delivered unpainted, for inspection and proof. The shells must be perfectly cleaned
Any
out,
empty, complete in every respect, and dry internally.
254
Such marking as may be necessary to identify the (b). steelmaker's cast number, and, in case of heat-treatment, the batch number, must be maintained by the contractor
upon every shell throughout manufacture, (c) must be delivered in lots for purposes of proof.
this
The
shell
lot
for
purpose
will consist, as far as possible, of shells of
the same cast, and, when heat-treatment is employed, of shells of the same batch number, and must not contain more than 121 shells, (d). When the number of shells in a cast or batch is less than 100, two casts or batches may be grouped together for this purpose. Main Examination after Delivery. Any shell of a (a). lot which fails to pass the chief inspector's gages, or fails to satisfy the chief inspector of its serviceability, will be reIf at any time during the examination it is jected, (b). found that defects of any nature, other than errors of machining, which involve rejection of defective shells, amount to 5 per cent of the number of the shells in the lot, the "lot" will be rejected, One or more shells selected from (c). the lot will be taken to pieces, and the body broken, if necessary, to ascertain that the details of manufacture and component parts are correct, and that the material is sound. Should they be incorrect, or the material unsound, in any particular, the lot will be rejected. The driving band will be cut out, and should it appear not to have been pressed thoroughly home into the undercut and groove throughout, the lot will be rejected, If, at any time during the (d). examination of a lot, it is found that 5 per cent of the shells in the lot depart from the approved design, further examination of the lot will be suspended. The whole of the lot must be re-examined by the firm and those shells which are incorrect eliminated. Those shells in which the departure can be rectified may be brought to the approved design by the firm. The lot may then be re-submitted. Tests. At least 1 per cent of the shells of every cast will be subjected to tensile tests. Test pieces will be cut from the shell blank, or from the finished shell at the option of the chief inspector, and must be capable of standing the
following
minimum
tests
255
Tenacity,
Tons per
Square Inch
256
-*,
u-,,-0.225"
1
BODY. FORGED STEEL
0.2^
|*-
i-H
U?* 0.401*-
g"g
ENLARGED SECTION SHOWING COPPER DRIVING BAND g
oS
-
H
..
0.345
FUSE SOCKET, BRASS

If
X,
' I
3.65'.T0.01^
.,
|
H.0.225 |r>
BRITISH! (WHIT.)~
^
LO_
i
-X^l,^^
3.300.011
tf
ZOT.P^H. hMiKr;o"C''/\
FIXING SCREW,
si
COPPER DRIVING BAND ELECTROLYTIC COPPER
STEEL
Machinery
Fig.
2.
Details of
British
18-pcunder Shrapnel Shell
257
sure of the round, if not taken, will be assumed to be that of the last round fired with the same charge in which pressure was taken. Further, should the shell be reported unsteady in flight, and be found on recovery to be without its driving band, or with the driving band loose or slipped in its seating, then the driving band of a similar number of shells to that taken for firing proof may be cut out to ascertain whether they have been properly pressed on; if they have not been pressed down to the satisfaction of the chief inspector, the lot will be rejected. If found correct, such shells will be rebanded by the contractor free of charge. The shells fired for proof may, after recovery, be (b). broken to ascertain the soundness of their material. Should any of the material be unsound in any respect, the lot will be rejected. A rejected lot must not be reRe-submission. (a). submitted unless the rejection is due to failure of the drivShells ing band, or to rectifiable gaging defects, (b). put out at any period of inspection for remediable defects may be re-submitted for further examination after the deIt is to be understood that the fects have been rectified. examination of such shells at that time will be incomplete, and that they are liable to rejection after rectification, (c) If the contractor wishes to re-invoice a lot rejected for failure of driving bands, he must remove the shells and re-band them before they are again submitted, (d). Rejected shells will, if considered necessary, be marked with a small rejection mark, so that they can be readily identified if re.
delivered.
Replacement
of Proof.
The contractor
will be required
to replace, free of charge, all shells expended in proof and examination, which, whether fired or otherwise tested, will be the property of the government.
All packages are to be so marked that the Packing. contained therein may be readily identified with the goods Unless it is specified in the contract that the packinvoice. cases or other packing material are to become the proping erty of the war department, they will remain the property of the contractor, who is responsible for their removal.
258
Should they not be removed within two months of the acceptance at the stores, they will be disposed of, and under such circumstances the contractor will not be entitled to make any claim for compensation. The packing cases must be marked "Returnable" or "Non-returnable." The shells may be inspected at any time Inspection. manufacture by, and after delivery will be subject during to testing by, and to the final approval of, the chief inspecofficer deputed In cases of defects occurring in manufacture which necessitate repairs, the contractor shall bring the same to the notice of the inspecting officer, and shall obtain from him written authority to proceed with such repairs as may entail patching, burning, electric welding, or other similar processes.
tor,
Royal Arsenal, Woolwich, England, or an
by him.
WEIGHT OF 18-POUNDER SHRAPNEL SHELL PARTS

Part
Weights (avoirdupois) Pounds Ounces Drama
Driving band
259
plug of a delivery which fails to pass the inspecting gages, or shows flaws or sponginess on the surface, or fails to satisfy the chief inspector, Woolwich, as to its If at any time during the serviceability, will be rejected. examination it is found that defects of any nature, other than errors of machining, which involve rejection of the defective plugs, amount to 5 per cent of the number of plugs in the delivery, the whole order will be rejected. If at any time during the examination of a delivery it is found that 5 per cent of the plugs in the delivery will depart from the approved design, further examination of the plugs will be suspended; the whole of the delivery must be re-examined by the firm, and those plugs which are incorrect to design eliminated. Those plugs in which the departure can be rectified may be brought to the approved design by the firm. The delivery may then be re-submitted for examination. The contractor will be required to replace free of charge all
Any
officers'
plugs expended in test and examination, which will become the property of the government.
CHAPTER
XI
SPECIFICATIONS FOR BRITISH COMBINATION TIME
AND PERCUSSION FUSES

specifications, abstracted from the official requirements relating to British "Mark I" (No. 85) combination time and percussion fuses, give the general infor-
The following
mation required in the manufacturing and inspection of these fuses. These specifications, in conjunction with the
very complete illustrations, Figs.
1 to 6, inclusive, of the design and details of the British fuse, give all the essential data required. The fuse consists of the following parts: Components. Body, top and bottom composition rings ; cap with set-screw base plug with screw plug; time detonator pellet in two parts percussion pellet with sleeve and firing pin detonators; four spiral springs; brass and steel pins; onion skin paper; unbleached muslin; felt cloth and brass washers; brass and tin-foil disks suspending ring for time pellet and onion skin paper patches. Metals. The body and composition rings are to be made of bronze or metal known as "Class B ;" the time detonator pellet and percussion pellet to be erf hard-rolled brass; the percussion firing pin pivot, of steel, phosphorized or blued the time and percussion firing pins, of bronze or "Class B" metal; all other parts of the fuse, except where otherwise The constated, of metal "Class C," or hard-rolled brass. tractor must supply the necessary metal for testing, free
;
of charge.
Metals designated by "classes" are copper alloys, the compositions of which are left to the discretion of the makers providing the metals conform to the above tests. Before proceeding to manufacture, the material must be submitted to the inspecting officer for mechanical test. When practicable, test pieces should not be less than 7 inches in length nor less than 1 inch in diameter, and will be required to stand the following minimum tests:
260
BRITISH COMBINATION FUSE
261
Metal
262
through the ring between the ends of the composition chanA recess is to be formed in the bore, nel, and recessed. from which a flash hole is to be drilled at an angle communicating with one end of the composition channel, a vertical
hole.
escape hole being made from the top surface to the flash An indicating mark is to be made on the outside of
13)
Machinery
Fig.
1.
British
"Mark
Fuse
Combination Time and Percussion Modified Form of American 21 -second Fuse

I"
(No. 85)
the ring. Two holes are to be bored between the ring and the stem of the body, into which pins are to be inserted to The ring is to be made 0.020 retain the ring in position. the dimension given on the drawing, and inch thicker than faced off to thickness after powder is pressed into the
groove.
Bottom Composition Ring.
The ring
is
to be turned all
263
over and bored to
fit
being grooved.
groove
the stem of the body, the upper surface is to be formed in the under side
for the composition, and an annular recess made, three holes hole being drilled from the upper face into the recess. is to be drilled in the ring from the under side between the
ends of the composition channel.

drilled, at
An
escape hole
is
to be
an angle, from the end of the composition channel to the annular recess, and a recess made to receive the closing disk. A hole communicating with the groove and the escape hole is to be drilled at an angle to the top surface to receive a powder pellet. A hole is to be drilled and recessed for a setting pin, which is to be secured by a small pin driven in. The ring is to be graduated from "0" to "21.2 ;"
each division, after the first, is to be sub-divided into five A line to denote safety position is to be marked. parts. The marking is to be blackened with japan black thinned with spirits of turpentine, except the mark denoting the safety point, which is to be colored red. The cap is to be machined all Cap with Set-screw. and recessed internally to receive the time detonator over, The lower part of the recess is to be threaded to pellet. screw over the stem of the body. Two slots are to be made in the cap to receive a key, and a hole is to be drilled through the side and tapped to take a brass set-screw. A groove is to be made near the top, which is to be partially closed by spinning over the edge. Four escape holes are to be drilled at an angle from the recess on the under side, into the
groove.
to
Base Plug. The base plug is to be threaded externally fit the bottom of the body. Two holes are to be drilled in the under side to facilitate assembling, and a central recess formed with a seating to receive a brass washer with a muslin disk. Six holes are to be drilled at an angle from the upper surface into the lower recess, and a hole drilled and tapped in the bottom to take a screw plug. This plug is to be threaded externally to fit into the bottom of the
base plug.
Time Pellet and Detonator. The pellet is to consist of two parts, which are to be turned and bored, the parts be-
264
ing screwed together to secure the detonator. A screwdriver slot is to be made in the top surface, and a seating
Fig.
2.
Details
of
British
Combination Fuse
formed on the outer surface for the suspension ring. The detonator is to be turned all over and recessed, four fire The recess holes being drilled through into the recess.
265
is to be coated with non-acid paint and charged with 0.45 grain of the following composition (giving parts by weight) 50 Glass 40 Fulminate of Mercury 20 Chlorate of Potash 30 of Antimony Sulphide
:
Shellac (dry)
2.8
The ingredients are to be thoroughly pulverized, excepting the fulminate, mixed dry, and then covered with alcoThe fulminate will then be added and the whole thorhol. oughly mixed. The composition is to be covered with a brass disk secured by shellac. The recess in the plug is to be coated with a composition of shellac and rosaniline and filled with 11/2 grain of shrapnel powder compressed with a total pressure of 60 pounds. The detonator is to be inserted in the holder, and secured in place by the screw plug, the two being locked together by a small brass pin. The percussion pellet is to be maPercussion Pellet. chined all over, two holes being bored in the upper surface and a slot cut to receive the firing pin. Two holes are to be drilled at right angles to the slot and parallel to the flat surfaces, one to receive the pivot for the firing pin and the other for the centrifugal bolts. The sleeve is to be machined all over, and is to be a driving fit on the pellet. Two spiral springs and two small pellets, and a pivot pin for the
firing pin, are to be provided. pin, are to be tinned all over.
All parts, except the pivot
bled, and a hole drilled into small brass pin driven in. Percussion Detonator and Holder. The percussion detonator is to be turned and recessed on both sides, two flash holes being drilled between the two recesses. The smaller recess is to be charged with 0.45 grain of the following
The parts are to be assemthe sleeve and pellet, and a
composition (the figures giving parts by weight) Chlorate of Potash 43.19

:
Sulphide of Antimony
21.5
7.5
Sulphur
Glass Shellac
.
10.5
1.7
266
0.32
0.1010.003
0.001,,
0.0015
T
[<
K- /NOTE: TIME
aMiaowJ
_
U_
||
i
jJLwesR
-
^MiSS6
..IF
0.002
I
GROOVE POWDER,
SEE SPEC.
SECTION
A-A THROUGH
LOCATING HOLE
DRILL 0. 073
iFTER ASSEMBLING
POLISH AND LACQUER THIS SURFACE
TIME AND PERCUSSIO TOP RING
v^
30-
^""^
^
30^_
,
_^^^_2^/
f 36 THDS. A lK0.22>i| afi-VALd X-*-STO.

>j
I I I
M"J
i*l
j
COAT WITH COMPOSITION OF

ROSANILINE
BOTTOM CLOSING SCREW

BRASS
0.064 DIA., 0.10 DEEP, DRILL AFTER
BOTTOM CLOSING SCREW PLUG

ONE
BRASS
OCATE AND DRIl AFTER ASSEMBLING CONCUSSION PLUNGER CUP
^__g 8
-H
CONCUSSION PLUNGER CU ONE BRASS
Fig.
3.
Details
of
British
Combination Fuse
267
The ingredients are to be thoroughly pulverized and mixed dry. Alcohol will be added to dissolve the shellac. The detonator will be formed by pressing the mixture, while
On the evaporation of in a plastic state, into the recess. the alcohol the composition should adhere strongly to the A brass disk, 34 in Fig. 5, is to be secured over metal. the composition with shellac. The larger recess is to be varnished with a composition of shellac and rosaniline, and 4 grains of shrapnel powder compressed into it with a pressure of 127 pounds and covered with a disk of tin foil, shelThe holder is to be threaded externally to fit in the body, and recessed to receive the detonator, a central hole and two key-holes being made. The powder pellets are to be made to the Pellets. shapes shown in Fig. 5. Pellets 33 and 35 are to be made from compressed unglazed black powder, with clearance holes as shown pellets 32 and 36 are to have the clearance holes filled with 0.05 and 0.02 grains, respectively, of gunlacked on.
;
cotton.
The springs used in the percusPercussion Springs. sion plunger must be made to the form and size shown in Fig. 5, and tinned. The percussion safety pin spring (21) is to be made from 0.012 inch diameter brass wire, tinned,
0.030 and wound so as to give a free height of 0.150 inch and at such a spacing as to give 44 coils per inch. inch, The percussion restraining spring (30) is to be made from 0.015 inch diameter brass wire, tinned, and wound so as to 0.050 inch, and at such a give a free height of 0.500 inch This spring is to have as to give 36 coils per inch. spacing a maximum resistance of 1.65 and a minimum of 1.5 ounce at an assembled height of 0.370 inch. The suspending ring for time detonSuspending Ring.
ator pellet is to be made of brass wire. The ring is to be of such strength that when tested with steel counterparts of the stem and pellet, the latter is forced through the ring with a deadweight load of from 69 to 77 pounds. The cloth washers are to be made from Cloth Washers. felt cloth, with holes cut in them. The body waterproofed
and graduated time train washers 16 and
17, respectively,
268
SPUN OVER
AMD TRIMME
0. 166
0.002
-~t |\
0. 166
O.OOS
^MfeSVMa"
BOTTOM CLOSING SCREW DISK ONE-UNBLEACHED MUSLIN SHEETING

SHELLACED
BOTTOM CLOSING SCREW WASHER

SHEET BRASS SHELLACED ON BOTTOM OF CLOSING SCREW DISK
|
GROOVE COVER ONE -ONION SKIN PAPER

H SHELLAC
AFTER GROOVE
PERCUSSION PRIMER CLOSING DISK

ONE
TINFOIL
0.875, ,
:
K0.2>J0.14<1.152 0.003
p|
N _oNE
BRASS
0.064 DIA. 0.15 LONG
DRIVEN IN
CONCUSSION PRIMER DISK

ONE-SHEET BRASS SHELLAC ON PRIMER
TIME AND PERCUSSION BOTTOM RING
Machinery
4.
Fig.
Details
of
British
Combination
Fuse
269
which are shown
in Fig. 5, are to be subjected to a pressure of approximately 10,000 pounds per square inch after asis screwed on and adjusted. The exterior surfaces of Lacquering and Polishing. the fuse are to be polished and lacquered with a lacquer consisting of 1 pound of seedlac, 8 ounces of turmeric, and
sembling, before closing cap
The groove in 8 pounds (1 gallon) of methylated spirits. the top and bottom composition rings, the magazine recess in the body, the powder channels and groove in the base plug, and the powder chambers of time detonator and percussion detonator holder, are to be lacquered with a lacquer
2 consisting of 10 grains of rosaniline, li/ pound of powdered shellac, and 1 quart of methylated spirits. The screw threads must, unless otherScrew Threads.
wise stated on the drawing, be of the British standard fine screw thread, and conform to the standard gages of the government inspector. For fuses not made in England, the British standard threads will not be insisted upon, except for the large thread on the body. The grooves on the under side of Time Arrangement the composition rings are to be charged with 56 grains of No. 22 meal powder compressed at 68,000 pounds per square inch the rings are then to be faced off, and the holes at the ends of the channels drilled. The onion skin paper washPerforated ers are to be secured to the surfaces by shellac. of black powder are to be inserted in the flash hole pellets in the top ring, escape hole and flash hole in bottom ring,
;
and
tom ring and
flash hole in the body, the pellets for escape hole in botflash hole having the perforation filled with
The space at the end of the channel in the bottom ring is to be filled with loose meal powder. An onion skin paper patch is to be secured over the flash hole in top ring, and the escape hole in bottom ring closed
loose guncotton.
by a brass disk secured by two center punch holes, and coated with shellac. The cloth washers are to be secured! on the upper faces of the body and the lower time ring with fish glue, and subjected to a pressure of 10,000 pounds per
square inch.
270
-*>.
i<-ao8
0.003,
CONCUSSION RESISTANCE RING
BOTTOM RING WASHER

ONION SKIN 0.0015 THICK,
TOP RING WASHER ONION SKIN 0.00 1 5 THICK,

0.54
FTER ASSEMBLING TO PERCUSSION PLUNGER
PERCUSSION PLUNGER HOUSING

ONE - BRASS -TINNED
t O.QQ2
U_
0.72
0.001
_>1
STAMP WITH Jj LETTERS AND FIGURES,
>^
~*0.156$!>.Q02\
0.165 0.002
LOCATE AND DRILL AFT ASSEMBLING TO PERCUSSION PLUNGER HOUSING PERCUSSION
PLUNGER
36 COILS PER INCH T
PERCUSSIO^N RESTRAINING
PERCUSSION FIRING PIN FULCRUM

ONE-STEEL DRILL ROD
SPRING HOUSING TWO-BRASS

TINNED
^,0
PERCUSSION SAFETY PIN TWO- BRASS-TIN NED
PERCUSStON RESTRAINING SPRING TWO-BRASS WIRE-TINNED
.uii^
ss&tsfjs
AjajLs&s! ,.m'
PERCUSSION PRIMER
ONE-BRASS
TIME TRAIN RING PELLET

ONE-COMPRESSED UNGLAZED BLACK POWDER
PERCUSSION PRIMER DISK USED ONE-SHEET BRASS
ONE-COMPRESSED UNGLAZEC BLACK POWDER

IN
GRAD. TIME TRAIN RING
Machin
Fig.
5.
Details
of
British
Combination
Fuse
271
The different parts of the Assembling and Closing. fuse are to be put together as in the assembly view, Fig. 1. The cap is to be screwed down so that a turning moment of 325 25 inch-ounces will just turn the ring, the cap being secured by means of a set-screw. The bench or table upon which the tensioning apparatus is fixed is to be jarred by tapping with a mallet to assist the turning of the ring. The base plug is to be screwed into the body, and the magazine filled with fine-grain powder through the filling hole. The bottom of the fuse is to be coated with shellac varnish. The fuses are to be delivered in lots of 2000, Delivery. an additional 40 being supplied free, for purposes of proof. In the event of further proof being required, the fuses will be taken from the lot. Proof. The fuses selected for proof will be tested as follows Ten will have the percussion arrangement removed, (a) and will be tested to determine the mean time of burning at rest. The time train will be set at the highest gradua:
tion mark.
The mean time
of burning, set full
when
cor-
rected for barometer, will be 22.9 seconds 0.4 second. The constant to be used, when correcting for barometer, is 0.023 of the mean time of burning, for every inch the
barometer reads above or below 30 inches, being plus when above and minus when below. The difference between the shortest and longest time of burning is not to be more than
0.5 second. will be taken; the fuse
fied above,
If the lot fails to pass this test, a further proof must burn within the limits speci-
otherwise the lot will be rejected. Should the detonator fail to ignite the time ring, a second proof will be taken should a similar failure occur at second proof, or should there be more than one such failure at first proof, the lot will be rejected. (b) Twenty fuses will be fired, at the same elevation, in any of the following guns, with full charges, and the time of burning noted. The requirements as to the result of the firing with the fuses set at different graduations are as given in detail in the following
;
:
272
1.
The mean
difference
from the mean time

:
of burning
of the 20 fuses
is
not to exceed
(
if set full if set
0.14 second
In 18-pounder guns
j
16
T In 10 13-pounder guns
,
if set full
if
set 14.
second second .0.13 second

.
0.2
The
difference between the longest

:
and shortest fuse
is
not to exceed
if
set full
.
0.75 second
.
In 18-pounder guns
if set
or omitting one fuse. 16 or omitting one fuse.

if
.0.6
0.6
.
.0.5
set full
0.9
In 13-pounder guns
or omitting one fuse .... 0.7 0.7 if set 14 .0.5 or omitting one fuse.
. .
second second second second second second second
2. If there is one blind fuse, a second proof will be taken. If there is a blind at second proof, or more than one such failure at first proof, the lot will be rejected.
(c)
shells,
Five fuses from a
lot will
be tested, in shrapnel
by
firing
them
velocity of 1500 to burst the shells at
from a gun with a muzzle 1800 feet per second. The fuses should from 5 to 50 yards from the muzzle of
set at "0"
the gun. Should there be a burst in the gun, the lot will be rejected. Should any fuse fail to act within 50 yards, second proof will be taken; should a similar failure occur in the second proof, or should there be more than one such failure at first proof, the lot will be rejected. Five fuses from a lot will be tested in common (d) shells by firing them over sand, at such an elevation that the angle of descent will not be more than 4 degrees. When
one only of a set of fuses so fired fails to burst on first graze the lot will be accepted without further proof; if there be more than one failure to burst on graze in the second proof, the lot will be rejected. The fuses must burst at the point of impact. For percussion proof the time ring is to be set on the bridge.
273
A premature explosion due to the fuse in any of (e) the foregoing proofs will cause the rejection of the lot. Should any other gun be introduced for proof of (f) this fuse, which differs from the above guns in either muzzle velocity or twist of rifling at muzzle, the above conditions will be subject to modification. If, in the proof of any delivery, defects are found (g) involving the serviceability of fuses, additional proof may be taken from any other delivery not finally closed, to ascer[<
2.28
:0 02
-
---9.9
0.03
SOLDERING STRIP
ONE-SHEET BRASS
SOFT SOLDER COMPOSITION :-3 PARTS LEAD, PART BISMUTH 3 PARTS TIN,
1
'CJT^fe
.
*%
CENTERING BOX
/*
'4
fe
x-*i
9^
SOLDERING STRIP
Fig.
6.
Details of British Combination
Fuse Cover and Case
tain
the defect is general. Should the fuses fail at this further proof, the delivery will be rejected without reference to the original proof. The total proof of any delivery The contractor will shall not exceed 5 per cent of the lot. be required to replace all fuses expended in further proof or examination free of charge, which, whether fired or otherif
wise tested, will become the property of the government. The components of the fuses, during (a) Inspection. manufacture and assembling, and the completed fuses after delivery, will be subject to examination and gaging by, and
274
to the final approval of, the chief inspector or an officer deputed by him. Any component or fuse, which is not
resentative, or
rejected.
finished to the satisfaction of the chief inspector, or his repwhich has any flaw or imperfection, will be
If, at any time during examination, it is found that (b) defects of any nature which involve rejection of the defec-
GBADUATION TABLE FOR TIME-RING ON BRITISH COMBINATION

TIME
AND PERCUSSION FUSE
0.02 WIDE, 0.01 DEEP
CROSS PAINTED RED GROOVES
Angle
Graduation Deg.
Graduation
Angle
Deg.
Min
to to to to to to to to 20 to 21 to
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
Min.
Oto5 Otol Ito2

2 to 3 3 to 4 4 to 5 5 to 6 6 to 7 7 to 8 8 to 11 each 11 to 12
26 16 15 15 16 14 14 14 13 13
13
45 15 30 30 40 35 15 55 35
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
21. 2
13 13 12 12 12 11 13 14 16 3
10
50 30
30 10 30 20 30
tive components, or fuses, amount to 5 per cent of the number in the lot, the lot will be rejected. If, at any time during examination of the lot, it is (c)
found that 5 per cent of fuses in the lot depart from the approved design, further examination will be suspended. The whole of the lot must be re-examined by the contractor and those fuses which are incorrect to design eliminated. Those fuses in which the departure can be rectified may be changed to the approved design by the contractor. The
lot
may
then be re-submitted for examination.
275
Tests for Safety in Transportation. From each lot, 20 time and 20 percussion plungers are to be tested to ascertain the correctness of their weights and static resistances. Lots of plungers not correct within the tolerence allowed
At the commencement of manufacture, 6 time and 6 percussion plungers from each lot will be subjected to a drop test against a steel block 11.5 inches in diameter, 4.5 inches thick, resting on a concrete pier, to determine the limit in heights at which the same will arm when carried in standard dropping pieces. One of the pieces weighs 15 pounds and has the form of a 3-inch shell
will be rejected.
;
the two other pieces are lighter and smaller. No concussion plunger is to begin to arm when falling in the lighter piece from a height of 4 feet 6 inches; all shall fully arm No percussion in the shell with 14 feet 8 inches drop. is to begin to arm in the special piece falling with plunger 6 feet 2 inches drop; all shall fully arm in the shell with a 17 feet 6 inches drop. Ten fuses will be placed, Jumbling and Jolting Test. one at a time, in a wooden box approximately 16 inches by 11 inches by 5 inches inside dimensions, revolving at thirty revolutions per minute, about one of its diagonals, for four hours. The fuses will then be placed in an adjustable fuseholder on the end of a hinged lever 16 inches long, which, by the motion of a cam, is raised 4 inches, thirty-five times per minute, and allowed to drop on an iron anvil. The fuses are thus dropped for an hour, point downward, base
downward, and side downward, respectively. The primer shields must not be marked, and the time trains, powder pellets, etc., must be intact.
CHAPTER
XII
SPECIFICATIONS FOR BRITISH 18-POUNDER QUICKFIRING CARTRIDGE CASE
AND PRIMER
18-pounder
The following
specifications of the British
quick-firing cartridge case and primer govern the facture and inspection of these cases and primers.
manuThey
are abstracted from the official specifications and give the most important information required by the manufacturer and inspector.
Construction. The cartridge may be either solid drawn brass or built up, the nature of the alloy and the thickness and distribution of the metal being left to the contractor, except that the dimensions must agree with those in Fig. 1. The maximum weight is to be 3 pounds 1 ounce. If electrolytic copper is used, it must be melted and run into In manufacture the number of drawings ingots before use. and the number of annealings must not be less than six. Should any folds or rings exist in the metal of the base, they must not be removed; any marks of cutting or turning of the metal of the inside of the base will cause the reIn the center of the base a hole is jection of the cartridge. to be bored and threaded to receive the primer. The cartare to be marked on the base with the numeral and ridges the contractor's initials or recognized trade mark. Screw Threads. The screw threads must, unless otherwise stated, be of the standard Whitworth thread, be cut full, and conform to the government inspector's standard Contractors may send their gages at any time to gages. the chief inspector to be checked and compared with the
The contractor is to supply, with the first delivery, a full-sized tracing, on tracing cloth, of the cartridge he is delivering. The contractor will also supply, free of charge, samples of the metal from which the cases are to be made, if requested by the chief inspector to do so. The samples should not be less than 6 by 2 inches.
276
standard gages. General Conditions.
BRITISH CARTRIDGE CASE
277
Cases in stock, that is, cases made before the date of the contract, must not be submitted for acceptance under a given contract. The cartridges should be delivered in lots of not less than If less than 400 are delivered, the number of rounds 400. to be fired in proof will be the same as if the delivery were the full 400. If, on examination of twenty per cent of a lot, it is found that departures from approved design, or defects of any nature, which involve rejection of the cases, average twenty-five per cent of the number examined, the whole of the lot will rejected. Not less than one-half per cent will be Proof. (a) At least one cartridge from each 400 defired in proof. livered will be fired three times, one round being with a
proof charge, and the cartridge being (if necessary) reformed after each round. In each remaining cartridge, one proof and one service round will be fired. The cartridge must load and extract easily, and (b) must not split or develop any flaw or crack on firing.
(c)
section
(d)
The cartridge may be sectioned after firing; the must show no cracks. The maximum pressure is not to be more than 19
tons per square inch. If, in the proof of any delivery, defects appear (e) which involve the serviceability of the article, additional proof may be taken from any other delivery not finally Should closed, to ascertain if the defect is general or not. fail at this further proof, the delivery will be rethe cases
The total jected without reference to the original proof. shall not exceed five per cent of the proof of any delivery
number
delivered.
of Proof.
Replacement
The contractor
will be required
to replace all cartridges expended in proof free of charge, and when the order is approaching completion, he will be
informed by the inspector how
many
are required to com-
plete the number on the order, exclusive of the cartridges so expended, which, whether fired or otherwise tested, will
become the property of the government.
278
All packages will be so marked that the goods Packing. contained therein may be readily identified with the invoice. Unless specified herein that the packing cases or other packing material will become the property of the war department, they will remain the property of the contracShould they not tor, who is responsible for their removal. be removed within two months of the acceptance of the cartridge cases, they will be disposed of, and in such circumstances the contractor will not be entitled to make any claim
11
MIN. CAPACITY
I
11
OF PROJECTILE
'
= 9+.8 Clj.lN.
-|
TO BASEJ
-i.oPARALLEL
8.25
Machinery
Fig.
1.
British 18-pounder Quick-firing Cartridge Case, giving Complete Dimensions, and Bore of Quick-firing Field Gun
for compensation. The packing cases must be turnable" or "Non-returnable."
marked "Re-
Spontaneous Cracking. Any cartridge found to be cracked before or after filling, but before firing, is to be replaced by the contractor if such crack is discovered within six months of the date of acceptance of the cartridge in question, which date is stamped on it. The cartridges may be inspected during manufacture by, and after delivery will be subjected to testing by, and to the

final
279
approval of, the chief inspector, Royal Arsenal, Woolwich, England, or an officer deputed by him. The primer is to consist of the following parts Primer. (see Fig. 2) body A; closing disk B; anvil C; plug D; cap E; tin foil F; ball G; paper disk H; gun powder /; and Pettman cement. The body is to be made of composition metal known as Class "A" or "B." All other metal parts of the primer, except where otherwise specified, are to be made of brass. The brass is not to contain more than 0.3 per cent of lead, nor to have more than one per cent of The Class "A" or "B" metal is total metallic impurities. It to be in accordance with the following requirements: in diameter, and free must be perfectly straight, uniform from cracks or flaws, and must be capable of standing the
:
following
minimum
tests:
Tenacity,
Tons per Square Inch
280
-PAPER DISK SECURED WITH PETTMAN CEMENT OUTSIDE TO BE COATED WITH A THIN LAYER
PAPER DISK SECURED WITH PETTMAN CEMENT COATED WITH PETTMAN CEMENT UNDER TURNOVER
IF
SAWED, NOT TO EXCEED 0.011
CLOSING DISK-BRASS
ANVIL- BRASS
Machinery
Fig.
2.
Primer for
British Quick-firing Shrapnel Shell Cartridge Cases
and
High-explosive
281
The interior is to be turned to be threaded to suit the body. soft copper ball, and three fire holes bored. out to receive the
A plug is
bored.
is
also to be threaded to suit the body,
nular recess turned on the inner side,
having an anand three fire holes
The cap is to be made of copper and the interior Cap. to be varnished with varnish composed of
:
Finest orange shellac .... 2 pounds 2 ounces. 8 pounds. Spirit, Methylated
The specific gravity of the varnish is to be 0.885. It is then to be charged with 1.2 grain of the following composition (figures give parts by weight)
:
Sulphide of antimony Chlorate of potash
18 12
1
1
Ground glass Meal powder

Sulphur
1
is
The composition
to be pressed into the cap with a
tin-foil disk, lacquered on one pressure of 800 pounds. is then to be placed on the composition with the lacside,
quered side outwards, and placed under a pressure of 400 pounds. It is then to be varnished with a varnish composed of:
Finest orange shellac .... 2 pounds 2 ounces. 1 pound. Seedlac Turmeric 8 ounces. 16 pounds. Spirit, Methylated
The specific gravity The lacquer for the

posed of
:
of this varnish
is to
be 0.865.
tin-foil disk before insertion is
com-
Seedlac
2 pounds.
Turmeric Spirit, Methylated
pound. 16 pounds.
The specific gravity of this lacquer is 0.85. The cap is to be externally coated with Pettman cement before inserting in the body, and then a fillet of Pettman
282

is is
cement cement
formed between the body and cap; Pettman
made from
shellac
the following ingredients:

7 pounds 8 ounces. 8 pounds.
5 pounds. 20 pounds 12 ounces
is
Gum
Spirit,
Methylated
Tar, Stockholm Red, Venetian
Gun Powder.
The primer
to be filled with R. F. G.
powder, the screw plug being first screwed in and fixed by three small punch blows, and the fire holes covered by a disk of paper secured with Pettman cement. A brass disk having a paper disk seClosing Disk. cured to it on the inner side by Pettman cement is to be placed on the top of the powder, and a ring of Pettman cement painted round the edge of the disk where the metal will be burred over onto it. After the primer is burred over, the whole of the exterior of the disk will also be coated with a thin layer of the cement. The primers will be marked Marking and Delivery. with the numeral, serial number, contractor's initials or recognized trade-mark, and date of manufacture. The primers will be delivered in lots of 1000, an additional 20 being supplied for proof with each 1000, or any less number supplied. In the event of further proof being required, the primers will be taken from the lot. A percentage of the primers will be selected inProof.
discriminately for proof.
(a)
fire
The primer when screwed
into a steel block
must
correctly with a 1-pound weight falling 25 inches, and ? ignite a puff consisting of 4 drams of R. F. G. powder enclosed in one thickness of shalloon, in a 12-inch vent
with special receiver, or when proved in any gun for which approved, it must ignite the charge without hang-fire.
miss-fire, hang-fire, pierced cap, or serious escape (b) of gas through or around the primer will cause rejection. The falling weight is to have a point of the same (c)
shape as the service striker. Should the firing proof or examination of any de(d) livery bring to notice any defect or defects which, in the

eor
283
[<
284
opinion of the chief inspector, affect the serviceability of the primers, the delivery in question may be rejected, or further proof taken at his discretion, not only from the particular delivery, but from any others made by the contractor which may be under inspection, to ascertain whether the defect is general. Should any primers fail at these further proofs, the delivery or deliveries will be rejected without reference to any previous proof. If, on examination of twenty per cent of a lot, it is found that departures from approved design or defects of any nature which involve rejection of the defective primers average 25 per cent of the number examined, the whole of the lot will be rejected. The contractor will be required to replace free of charge all primers expended in proof and examination, which, whether fired or otherwise tested, will become the property of the government.
The general dimenSpecifications for Cartridge Clip. sions for the cartridge clip are given in Fig. 3. The clip is made from hard-rolled sheet brass in one piece. Four arms are to be formed; the ends of each are bent projecting
over as indicated. The clip with a lacquer composed of:
is
sand-blasted, and lacquered
Vegetable black Seedlac
pound. 1% pound. 2 pounds. Turpentine (1 quart) ... .12 pounds. Methylated spirits (6 quarts)
is
One arm
coated with paint consisting of:

2 ounces.
1
Vermillion, dry
Shellac, dry
ounce.
White hard varnish

Spirits,
%
l!/2
ounce. ounce.
Methylated
is
Loop.
cotton,
1/2
The loop
to consist of 13 inches of "webbing,
inch," threaded through the clip and sewed. Three yards of webbing, selected from the bulk, are to be
submitted to the chief inspector before being used. The webbing submitted will be cut into lengths of 11 inches and the ends of each length securely fixed in the clamps of a
285
The testing machine, the clamps being 7 inches apart. strain will be gradually increased until the sample breaks. The breaking
Delivery.
less than 200 pounds. be delivered in lots of 1000. If, on examination of 20 per cent of a lot, it is found that departures from approved design, or defects of any nature, which involve rejection of the clips average 25 per cent of the number examined, the whole of the lot will be rejected.
strain
must not be
The
clips will
CHAPTER
XIII
SPECIFICATIONS FOR AMERICAN SHRAPNEL SHELLS

shells comprise the following forged shell body, copper driving band, head, washer, tubes, bullets, matrix, head filler, diaphragm, base charge, and fuse. In some cases a Semple tracer is used, and, when this is the case, the base of the shrapnel must be machined
The American shrapnel

:
parts
to
is to be made of forged alloy steel or bar stock having the properties outlined in Table I. The forgings must be annealed so that they can be machined with reasonable ease. The maximum elastic limit for the 2.95-inch and 3-inch shell forgings must not exceed 115,000 pounds per square inch, and in case of the 3.8-inch, 4.7-inch, and 6-inch must not exceed 110,000 pounds per square inch. All shrapnel shells must be subjected to an exterior hy-
Shell.
accommodate it. The shell
draulic pressure of 20,000 pounds per square inch up to the rotating band, and to an interior hydraulic pressure of 1000 certain number from each 1000 pounds per square inch.
shells are also subjected to- a ballistic test
pleted shrapnels
by firing comfrom a gun with a maximum pressure of 37,000 pounds, except for the 6-inch, which will be fired
under a pressure of 22,500 pounds per square inch. The shell is to be finished outside and inside except at points otherwise indicated, where it is to be left in the
rough-forged state. The inside of the shell is to be coated with non-acid paint, except where machined, and the powder chamber is to be given a heavy coat. Great care should be taken to remove all burrs, scale, and sharp corners. The
outline of the shell after the first operation,
when made
from bar
by dotted lines in Fig. 1. The machined as illustrated to the right at A in Fig. 1, when a Semple tracer is used. The copper driving band is to be Copper Driving Band. cut from tubing of pure electrolytic copper, and machined to the dimensions shown. It is to be heated and expanded
286
stock, is shown base of the shell is to be
AMERICAN SHRAPNEL SHELL

PRESS METAL OF FUSE INTO
287
MATRIX
RESIN AND MONO-NITRONAPTHALENE
rW^-Si
><
0.45-~>t*-0.35-
MODIFICATION OF REAR END OF PROJECTILE FOR USE IN 3 INCH HOWITZER

0.87
TUBE
ONE
SEAMLESS DRAWN BRASS, TUBING 0.05 THICK. COAT INSIDE WITH SHELLAC
(A
LOCKING PIN TWO STEEL

FINISH
0.005
DRIVE AND PEEN AFTER ASSEMBLING HEAD TO CASE
Fig.
1.
Assembly and Details
of
American Shrapnel
Shell
288
diameter for the 3-inch shell and is shrunk into the seat, then forced into the scores by passing through a die and afterwards turned to size. Washer and Head. The washer for the 3-inch shellis to be made from steel 0.031 inch thick and formed to shape by punching. The head is to be made from colddrawn steel, finished all over, and coated inside with a nonacid paint. The crimping wall is to be turned down over
to 2.985 inch inside to be
FUSE HOLE PLUG

DIE
FUSE HOLE PLUG

WROUGHT
0.03K
IRON OR BRONZE 0.010
CAST WHITE METAL NON-CORROSIVE

0.010
DIAPHRAGM
FORGED STEEL
0.005
.Machinery
Fig.
2.
Details of
American Shrapnel
Shell
the washer after machining, and a hole drilled after the head is assembled to the shell. Five notches equally spaced are to be cut around the head, and a crimping groove cut for putting on the fuse protecting cap.
Tube. The tube is to be made from seamless drawn brass tubing, and is to be coated inside with shellac. An additional short tube is to be inserted at the nose or mouth of this tube, next to the fuse; this latter is to be made from seamless drawn copper, and is to be forced into the tube under pressure and crimped over.

Bullets.
289
used in the shrapnel are to be made from 12.5 per cent antimony to 87.5 per cent lead, and are to be flattened with six faces as shown in the illustration 252 bullets are used in the 3-inch shrapnel. The matrix is to consist of Matrix and Head Filler. resin and mono-nitronaphthalene, poured into the shell, as The head is will be described in connection with loading. to be filled with melted resin, poured in. The diaphragm is to be made of forged Diaphragm. It is to be drilled and counsteel to the dimension shown. terbored, and great care should be taken to remove all burrs, sharp corners, and scale. The bottom of the diaphragm is also to be given a heavy coat of non-acid paint.
bullets
;
The
TABLE
I.
PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF STEEL FOR VARIOUS SIZES OF SHRAPNEL SHELLS
Caliber,
Inches
290
O OOO
1-1
<M CO
t- 1- t- t- 1-
>l
00 J> IO OS
<N 04 CO T*
10'
<M (M 10 TH
O 10 Or^
CO*
J> 00
OS
CQ CO CO
O 00 t- O ^ O
CQ.r-i
1C
O O5
<N <N <M CO CO
10
CO
ooooo
iO IO IO 00 l>
CO CO CO '^ Ô
1
CO <M CO
r*
00 ^^ CO CO
11 ^2
OS
O 00 C- O
CO! CO* CO* rj<

melted resin
291
Next put in one layer of bullets is poured in. and pour in 0.4 ounce of melted resin; then put in 108 (18) Then pour in bullets and pack by a pressure of six tons.
;
3.75 ounces of melted mono-nitronaphthalene put in 126 bullets drive down with mallet below end of tube and pour
;
;
After the mass has thoroughly cooled, face off matrix so that the depth from the end of the shell shall be 0.27 inch to allow for screwing in head, which should bear down hard on matrix. Next place washer
in 4 ounces of melted resin.
TABLE
III.
WEIGHTS AND MATERIALS USED 3-INCH SHRAPNEL SHELLS
IN
AMERICAN
Part
292
pressed
down until it rests on the shoulder of the diaphragm about one inch long. The case is to be stamped as follows with letters 1/16 inch high: Lot number of shrapnel shell, purchase order, date of issue of purchase order, fiscal year, and initials of manufacturer.
and
is
TABLE
IV. PRINCIPAL DIMENSIONS OF VARIOUS SIZES OF CARTRIDGE CASES USED ON AMERICAN SHRAPNEL SHELLS
INDEX
PAGE
American shrapnel
specifications
shell,
section of
286
8
American type of fuse Annealing and washing cartridge cases Automatic Machine Co.'s threading lathe used
178
for threading shells
129
Band, machining
rifling
68 66
pressing on rifling Besly grinder equipped for grinding shrapnel Brass for cartridge cases Brass plugs for fuse, forging
137
235 145
146
Brass socket, machining

British cartridge cases, specifications British fuses, specifications British primers, specifications British shrapnel shell, section of
specifications
276
260
279
3
251
for
Brown & Sharpe machines used

Bullets,
making fuse parts
164
140
shrapnel
of
Caley method
Cartridge
cases,
making shrapnel forgings annealing and washing
20
178
176 172 190 180
cupping drawing
list of
operations
for
machining
specifications
British
276 231 192 179 284

85
specifications for Russian
summary
of operations
testing hardness of Cartridge clip, British
Cleveland "Automatic" used for making shrapnel shells

Clip,
British cartridge
284
162 162
Closing cap, machining Closing screw, machining
Copper
rifling band, machining pressing on Cupping cartridge cases
68
!
66
176
293
294
Detonators
specifications
for
INDEX
PAGE
15
Russian
."
245
39
Diaphragm forging Drawing operations on cartridge cases

table of operations
Drilling percussion primers Drilling timing fuse plugs
,
172
190 167 170

14
4
Explosives, classification of
shrapnel shells manufacture of high

in
18
Forging brass plugs for fuse Forging diaphragms Forging fuse sockets Forging shrapnel heads Forging shrapnel shells French shrapnel shell, section of French type of fuse Fulminates
Fuse, American type
145
39
143
38 20
3
11
15
8
French type Russian type

specifications for British
11
9
260
213
6
specifications for Russian
time and percussion Vickers' type
228 150 165 156 166 143 170
Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse
machining hammers, making nose, machining nut, making parts, making

bodies,
plugs,
drilling
sockets, forging
143
171
72,
timing ring, graduating

for shrapnel parts
Gages
73 71
3
Gaging shrapnel shells
German shrapnel
shell,
section of
Graduating fuse timing ring Gridley "Automatics," used for making fuse parts used for making shrapnel shells Grinding shrapnel shells
171
156 103
64,
132 179
Hardness
of
testing, of cartridge cases

,
shrapnel shells
48
INDEX
Head, machining shrapnel Heading operations on cartridge cases, table Heat-treating department, lay-out of Heat-treatment of shrapnel shells
.
295
PAGE
152
190
58,
59 47 25 29
Holinger method of making shrapnel f orgings Hydraulic press method of forging shrapnel
Libby
turret lathe used for machining shrapnel shells Lo-swing lathe used for machining shells
for shrapnel manufacture Machining shrapnel shells Marking shrapnel shells
122 114
Machines
75 40
74
New
Britain "Automatics" used for making Norton method of grinding shrapnel shells
fuse, parts
146
133
167
90 15 16
Percussion primers, drilling Potter & Johnston "Automatics" used for machining forged shells Powder, black smokeless
cups, press tools for Press tools for powder cup
Powder
139 139
Primers, charging
for fuses, drilling
246
167
British
specifications
for
279
Reed-Prentice equipment for machining shrapnel shells Rifling band, machining. pressing on Rough-turning operations on shrapnel forgings Russian cartridge cases, specifications for Russian combination fuse, Vickers' type Russian shrapnel shell fuses, specifications Russian shrapnel shell, section of
specifications
75
68
66
43
231
228
213
3
194
9
Russian type of fuse
Shrapnel bullets
Shrapnel cartridge cases Shrapnel head, forging machining Shrapnel shells, forging grinding heat-treatment
140
172
38
152
20
64,
132
47
296
history
INDEX
PAGE
1
machines and tools for manufacture machining

present design
specifications for American specifications for British
specifications steel for
for
75
40
2
286
251
Russian
194
51
3
types
Smokeless powder Socket, machining

Specifications, for
16
.146, 150
American shrapnel
cases
shells
286
for British cartridge for British fuses
276
260 279 251
231
for British primers for British shrapnel shells for Russian cartridge cases for Russian shrapnel shells
194
-.
for Russian shrapnel shell fuses Steel for shrapnel
213
51
Tensile strength, testing Testing hardness of cartridge cases Testing shell body for hardness and tensile strength Threading shells
48
179
48
129 170 171
Timing fuse plugs, drilling Timing ring, graduating machining

Tools for shrapnel manufacture
162
75
Varnish
Vickers'
for cartridge cases.
242
type of fuse
turret lathe, used for machining bar-stock
228
Warner & Swasey

shells
112
109
used for machining forged shells
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY
BERKELEY
THIS BOOK
IS DUE ON THE LAST DATE STAMPED BELOW
to
Books not returned on time are subject to a fine of 50c per volume after the third day overdue, increasing $1.00 per volume after the sixth day. Books not in
demand may be renewed

expiration of loan period.
if
application
is
made
before
JAN
192S
50m-7,'16,l
338018
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY

Shrapnel Shell Manufacture 1915 1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Shrapnel Shell Manufacture 1915 1

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Shrapnel Shell Manufacture 1915 1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SHRAPNEL SHELL

ASSOCIATE EDITOR OF MACHINERY AUTHOR OF "ADVANCED GRINDING PRACTICE,"

"AUTOMATIC SCREW MACHINE PRACTICE," "MACHINE FORGING," ETC.

THE INDUSTRIAL PRESS

THE INDUSTRIAL PRESS NEW YORK

interest, especially to those

who know something

contains abstracts of the

on the manufacture of munitions that has been made since

YORK, October, 1915.

Forging Shrapnel Shells

Machines and Tools for Shrapnel Manufacture

Manufacture and Russian 3-inch

and High-explosive Cartridge Cases

Quick-firing Shrapnel Shell

Specifications for British Combination

Time and Percussion Fuses

18-pounder Case and

SHRAPNEL SHELL MANUFACTURE

whereas the high-explosive

and detonates on impact.

This type of shell

shrapnel, and, therefore, the alone will be taken up in the

Original Shell designed by Lieut. Henry Shrapnel Col. Boxer's Improvement

made from bar

Combination Timing and Percussion Fuse used on Shrapnel Shells

Russian Type of Combination Timing and Percussion Fuse

in this vent to the

adjustable timing ring.

which is wound around the head of the fuse

also provided with a fuse

by impact should the timing fuse

graduations differs. The reason for this

tion of the vents, the positions of the

lower timing train, the trajectory of the

the decrease of velocity.

in the base of the projectile,

powder charge used

explosives, such as nitroglyetc., the progress of the ex-

compressed under hydraulic pressure.

generally used to provide the

powder used most extensively as

Xylene Other substances

FORGING SHRAPNEL SHELLS

FORGING SHRAPNEL SHELLS

was used almost

Diagram showing Caley Process

Hydraulic Forging Presses

FORGING SHRAPNEL SHELLS

The next was pierced

3.275, 3.215, 3.175, 3.145, The shape given to the

and 3.125. drawing edges of the

The mouth or entering

side of the hole

lasted the longest because the metal

was hotter at was drawn completely through the

FORGING SHRAPNEL SHELLS

FORGING SHRAPNEL SHELLS

in turret lathes or semi-automatic